Delta C2000 Series User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Delta Manuals
  4. DC Drives
  5. C2000 Series
  6. User manual

Delta C2000 Series User Manual

Vector control drive
Hide thumbs Also See for C2000 Series:
1
2
3
4
5
Table Of Contents
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Industrial Automation Headquarters
Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C.
Post code : 201209
TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996
Customer Service: 400-820-9595
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.
Tokyo Office
Industrial Automation Sales Department
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012
TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.
Seoul Office
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd.
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z),
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang,
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand
TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827
Delta Energy Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd.
Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia
TEL: 61-3-9543-3720
Americas
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A
São Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 – 3˚ Andar - Bela Vista
CEP: 01332-000 – São Paulo – SP - Brasil
TEL: 55-11-3530-8642 / 55-11-3530-8640
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Mexico Office
Vía Dr. Gustavo Baz No. 2160, Colonia La Loma,
54060 Tlalnepantla Estado de Mexico
TEL: 52-55-2628-3015 #3050/3052
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
DELTA_IA-MDS_VFD-C2000_UM_EN_20190213
EMEA
Headquarters:
Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Sales: Sales.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
Marketing: Maketing.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
Technical Support: iatechnicalsupport@deltaww.com
Customer Support: Customer-Support@deltaww.com
Service: Service.IA.emea@deltaww.com
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
BENELUX:
Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Mail: Sales.IA.Benelux@deltaww.com
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
DACH:
Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Mail: Sales.IA.DACH@deltaww.com
TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
France:
Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
Mail: Sales.IA.FR@deltaww.com
TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Iberia:
Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
C/Llull, 321-329 (Edifici CINC) | 22@Barcrelona, 08019 Barcelona
Mail: Sales.IA.Iberia@deltaww.com
TEL: +34 93 303 00 60
Italy:
Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Ufficio di Milano Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano (MI)
Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Mail: Sales.IA.Italy@deltaww.com
TEL: +39 02 64672538
Russia:
Delta Energy System LLC
Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
17 121357 Moscow Russia
Mail: Sales.IA.RU@deltaww.com
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
Turkey:
Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Mail: Sales.IA.Turkey@deltaww.com
TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
GCC:
Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR)
P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Egypt + North Africa:
Delta Electronics
511 Cairo Business Plaza, North 90 street,
New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt
Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
Delta Vector Control Drive
C2000 Series User Manual
w w w. d e l t a w w. c o m

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Delta C2000 Series

Summary of Contents for Delta C2000 Series

  • Page 1 TEL: +7 495 644 3240 P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey) TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969 Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A Mail: Sales.IA.Turkey@deltaww.com...
  • Page 2 Limitation of Liability The contents of this user manual are only for the use of the AC motor drives manufactured by Delta. Except as defined in special mandatory laws, Delta provides this user manual “as is” and does not offer any kind of warranty through this user manual for using the product, either express or implied, including but not limited to the following: (i) this product will meet your needs or expectations;...
  • Page 4 PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY. Disconnect AC input power before connecting any wiring to the AC motor drive.  Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link  capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Do NOT touch the DANGER internal circuits and components.
  • Page 5 2. Use other methods, such as heat treatment or any other non-fumigation treatment, to deworm the wood packaging material. 3. If you use heat treatment to deworm, leave the packaging materials in an environment of over 56°C for a minimum of thirty minutes. ...

  • Page 6: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ........................1-1 1-1 Nameplate Information…....................1-2 1-2 Model Name………….......................1-3 1-3 Serial Number.........................1-4 1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device………………………………………………...…….1-5 1-5 RFI Jumper…........................1-6 1-6 Dimensions........................1-9 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ........................2-1 2-1 Mounting Clearance......................2-2 2-2 Air Flow and Power Dissipation..................2-5 CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING ........................
  • Page 7 8-16 CMC-PN01 ..........8-41 -- Communication card, PROFINET 8-17 EMC-COP01 ..........8-45 -- Communication card, CANopen 8-18 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables………………………………………………………8-46 CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ........................9-1 9-1 230V Series…………………………………................9-2 9-2 460V Series…………………………………................9-3 9-3 575V Series…………………………………………………………………………………..….…...….9-5 9-4 690V Series………………………………………………………………….………………..…………9-6 9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation………………………….....9-10 9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level……........9-11...
  • Page 8 10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01............10-34 10-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor on KPC-CC01 Keypad………………10-38 CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETERS ..................11-1 00 Drive Parameters…………………………………………….………………………………………..11-1 01 Basic Parameters…………………………………………………………………………………….11-10 02 Digital Input / Output Parameters………………………………………………….……………….11-14 03 Analog Input / Output Parameters…………………………………………..………………….…..11-20 04 Multi-stage Speed Parameters…………………………………………………………………..…11-24 05 Motor Parameters……………………………………………………….……………………………11-27 06 Protection Parameters……………………………………………………………………………….11-30...
  • Page 9 CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ....................15-1 15-1 CANopen Overview……………………................15-3 15-2 Wiring for CANopen……………………….................15-6 15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description.……………..........15-7 15-4 CANopen Supporting Index ……..................15-19 15-5 CANopen Fault Codes ………………………..............15-26 15-6 CANopen LED Function……………................15-34 CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION APPLICATIONS ................... 16-1 16-1 PLC Summary……………………..................16-2 16-2 Notes Before PLC Use……………………................16-3 16-3 Turn On…………….......…………..............16-5 16-4 Basic Principles of PLC Ladder Diagrams..............16-15...

  • Page 10: Chapter 1 Introduction

    Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Chapter 1 Introduction Nameplate Information Model Name Serial Number Apply After Service by Mobile Device RFI Jumper Dimensions...

  • Page 11: Nameplate Information

    Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Receiving and Inspection After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following: Please inspect the unit after unpacking to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the nameplate.

  • Page 12: Model Name

    Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 1-2 Model Name 230V/460V Model 575V/690V Model...

  • Page 13: Serial Number

    Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 1-3 Serial Number 230V/460V Model 575V/690V Model...

  • Page 14: Apply After Service By Mobile Device

    3. Point your camera to the QR Code. Hold your camera steady so that the QR code comes into focus. 4. Access the Delta after Service website. 5. Fill your information into the column marked with an orange star. 6. Enter the CAPTCHA and click “Submit” to complete the application.

  • Page 15: Rfi Jumper

    Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 1-5 RFI Jumper (1) In the drive there are Varistor / MOVs, which are connected from phase to phase and from phase to ground, to protect the drive against mains surges or voltage spikes. Because the Varistors / MOVs from phase to ground are connected to ground via the RFI jumper, the protection will be ineffective when the RFI jumper is removed.
  • Page 16 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Isolating main power from ground: When the power distribution system of the drive is a floating ground system (IT Systems) or an asymmetric ground system (Corner Grounded TN Systems), you must remove the RFI jumper. Removing the RFI jumper disconnects the internal capacitors from ground to avoid damaging the internal circuits and to reduce the ground leakage current.
  • Page 17 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems) Caution: Do not remove the RFI jumper while the input terminal of the Power Regenerative Unit carries power. In the following four situations, the RFI jumper must be removed. This is to prevent the system from grounding through the RFI capacitor and damaging the Power Regenerative Unit.

  • Page 18: Dimensions

    Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 1-6 Dimensions Frame A VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E; VFD015C53A-21; VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21 See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-15 Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3...
  • Page 19 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame B VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E; VFD150C43A/E; VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21 See Detail A See Detail A See Detail B See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-16 Unit: mm [inch] Frame...
  • Page 20 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame C VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A/E; VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21; VFD300C63B-21; VFD370C63B-21 See Detail A See Detail B See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-17 Unit: mm [inch] Frame...
  • Page 21 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame D0 D0-1: VFD370C43S; VFD450C43S See Detail A SEE DETAIL A See Detail B SEE DETAIL B Detail A Detail B DETAIL A DETAIL B (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-18 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 280.0 500.0...
  • Page 22 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame D0 D0-2: VFD370C43U; VFD450C43U See Detail A SEE DETAIL A See Detail B SEE DETAIL B Detail A Detail B DETAIL A DETAIL B (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-19 Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2...
  • Page 23 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame D D1: VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00 See Detail A SEE DETAIL A See Detail B SEE DETAIL B Detail A Detail B DETAIL A DETAIL B (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-20 Unit: mm [inch] Frame...
  • Page 24 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame D D2: VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E; VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21 See Detail A SEE DETAIL A See Detail B SEE DETAIL B Detail A Detail B DETAIL A DETAIL B (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-21 Unit: mm [inch] Frame...
  • Page 25 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame E E1: VFD450C23A; VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A; VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A; VFD750C63B-00; VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00 See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail B (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-22 Unit: mm [inch] Frame S1, S2 Ф1 Ф2 Ф3 370.0 300.0 335.0...
  • Page 26 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame E E2: VFD450C23E; VFD550C23E; VFD750C23E; VFD900C43E; VFD1100C43E; VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21 See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail B (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-23 Unit: mm [inch] Frame S1, S2 Ф1 Ф2 Ф3 370.0 715.8 300.0...
  • Page 27 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame F F1: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00 See Detail A See Detail A See Detail B See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-24 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 420.0...
  • Page 28 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame F F2: VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E; VFD1600C43E; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21 See Detail A See Detail A See Detail B See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-25 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 420.0...
  • Page 29 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame G G1: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00 See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail B (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-26 Unit: mm [inch] Frame Ф1 Ф2 Ф3 500.0 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 [19.69]...
  • Page 30 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame G G2: VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E; VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21 See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail B (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-27 Unit: mm [inch] Frame Ф1 Ф2 Ф3 500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0...
  • Page 31 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame H H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A; VFD4000C63B-00; VFD4500C63B-00; VFD5600C63B-00; VFD6300C63B-00 See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail B (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-28 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 1435.0 398.0 630.0 290.0 1403.0 1346.6 [27.56] [56.5]...
  • Page 32 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame H H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1 See Detail A Side fixing baffle plate Side fixing baffle plate See Detail B Detail A Detail B (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-29 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0...
  • Page 33 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Frame H H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E See Detail A Side fixing Side fixing baffle plate 側邊固定件 側邊固定件 baffle plate See Detail B Detail A Detail B (Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole) Figure 1-30 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0...
  • Page 34 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 690V Frame H H2: VFD4000C63B-21; VFD4500C63B-21; VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21 See Detail A See Detail A See Detail B See Detail B Side fixing Side fixing baffle plate 側邊固定件 側邊固定件 baffle plate See Detail C See Detail C Detail C Detail C (Mounting (Mounting hole) Hole)
  • Page 35 Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 KPC-CC01 Figure 1-32 1-26...

  • Page 36: Chapter 2 Installation

    Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Chapter 2 Installation 2-1 Mounting Clearance 2-2 Air Flow and Power Dissipation...
  • Page 37 Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 2-1 Mounting Clearance Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from  adhering to the heat sink Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one, ...
  • Page 38 Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Frame A [mm] B [mm] C [mm] D [mm] A–C D0–F 200 (100, Ta=Ta*=50℃) VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A; Frame A VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E; VFD015C53A-21; VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21 VFD055C23A; VFD75C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E; Frame B VFD150C43A/E; VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21 VFD150C23A;...
  • Page 39 Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 NOT E The mounting clearances stated in the figure is for installing the ※ drive in an open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or electric box), please follow the following three rules: (1) Keep the minimum mounting clearances.
  • Page 40 Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 2-2 Air Flow and Power Dissipation Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor drive Flow Rate [cfm] Flow Rate [m /hr] Power Dissipation [W] Model No. Loss External External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total (Heat sink)
  • Page 41 Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor drive Flow Rate [cfm] Flow Rate [m /hr] Power Dissipation [W] Model No. Loss External External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total (Heat sink) VFD370C63B-21 89.0 21.3 110.3 151.2...

  • Page 42: Chapter 3 Unpacking

    Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Chapter 3 Unpacking 3-1 Unpacking 3-2 The Lifting Hook...
  • Page 43 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time.
  • Page 44 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. ready for installation. Figure 3-3 Figure 3-6...
  • Page 45 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame D (crate version) Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXCXXA, VFDXXXC63B-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXCXXE, VFDXXXC63B-21) Loosen the 12 screws to open the top cover of the Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the crate. crate, and then remove the iron plates. Figure 3-7 Figure 3-11 Take out the EPEs and the manual.
  • Page 46 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the ten screws fasten the drive on the ready for installation. pallet, and then remove the wood plate. Figure 3-13 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Figure 3-10 ready for installation.
  • Page 47 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame E Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXCXXA, VFDXXXC63B-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXCXXE, VFDXXXC63B-21) Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the crate, and then remove the iron plates. crate, and then remove the iron plates.
  • Page 48 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. ready for installation. Figure 3-18 Figure 3-22...
  • Page 49 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame F Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXCXXA, VFDXXXC63B-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXCXXE, VFDXXXC63B-21) Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. Figure 3-23 Figure 3-27 Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the...
  • Page 50 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation ready for installation. Figure 3-26 Figure 3-30...
  • Page 51 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame G Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXCXXA, VFDXXXC63B-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXCXXE, VFDXXXC63B-21) Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. Figure 3-35 Figure 3-31 Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the...
  • Page 52 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. ready for installation. Figure 3-34 Figure 3-38 3-11...
  • Page 53 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame H Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXC43A) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXC43E-1) Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. Figure 3-39 Figure 3-43 Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the...
  • Page 54 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates ready for installation. (see the figure below). You can use the removed screws and iron plates to fix the drive from outside.
  • Page 55 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame H Unpacking 3 (VFDXXXC43E) Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. Figure 3-49 Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber and the manual. Figure 3-50 Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six plastic washers.
  • Page 56 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates (see the figure below). You can use the removed screws and iron plates to fix the drive from the outside. Figure 3-52 Fix the drive from the inside Fix the drive from the outside Loosen the 18 M6 screws and remove the covers Loosen the eight M8 screws, and then use these...
  • Page 57 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure below. below. Torque: 35–45 kg-cm / [30.8–39.06 lb-in] / [3.4–4.4 Nm] Figure 3-55 Figure 3-57 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. Figure 3-58 3-16...
  • Page 58 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 690V Frame H Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXC63B-00) Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. Figure 3-59 Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the manual. Figure 3-60 Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six plastic washers.
  • Page 59 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. Figure 3-62 3-18...
  • Page 60 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 690V Frame H Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXC63B-21) Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. Figure 3-63 Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber and the manual. Figure 3-64 Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six plastic washers.
  • Page 61 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates (see the figure below). You can use the removed screws and iron plates to fix the drive from the outside. Figure 3-66 Fix the drive from the inside. Fix the drive from the outside.
  • Page 62 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure below. below. Figure 3-69 Figure 3-71 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. Figure 3-72 3-21...
  • Page 63 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame H: Fix the drive VFDXXXC43A Screw: M12*6 Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] / [33.3–41.2 Nm] Figure 3-73 VFDXXXC43E & VFDXXXC43E-1 Fix the drive from the inside. Screw: M12*8 Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] / [33.3–41.2 Nm] Figure 3-74 3-22...
  • Page 64 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Fix the drive from the outside. Screw: M12*8 Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] / [33.3–41.2 Nm] Figure 3-75 VFDXXXC63B Screw M 12*6 Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] / 33.32–41.16 Nm] Figure 3-76 3-23...
  • Page 65 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 VFDXXXC63B-21 Fix the drive from the outside. Screw: M12*8 Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] / [33.32–41.16 Nm] Figure 3-77 3-24...
  • Page 66 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 3-2 The Lifting Hook The arrows indicate the location of the lifting holes of frame D to H, as shown in figure below: Frame D0 Applicable models: VFD370C43S; VFD450C43S; VFD370C43U; VFD450C43U Figure 3-78 Frame D Applicable models: VFD300C23A;...
  • Page 67 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Frame F Applicable models: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A; VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E; VFD1600C43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21 Figure 3-81 Frame G Applicable models: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E; VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00; VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21 Figure 3-82 Frame H Applicable models: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A;...
  • Page 68 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 690V Frame H3 Applicable models: VFD4000C63B-21; VFD4500C63B-21; VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21 Figure 3-84 3-27...
  • Page 69 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram. lifting device is within the specification, as shown in the following figure. Applicable to Frame D0–E Applicable to Frame D0–E Figure 3-85...
  • Page 70 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Weight VFDXXX C X X X A V FD XXX C X X X E VFDXXXXCXXE: 29kg / [63.9 lbs] VFDXXXXCXXA: 27kg / [59.5 lbs] 27 kg(59.5 Ibs.) 29 kg(63. 9 Ibs.) Figure 3-89 Figure 3-90 VFDXXXXCXXA: 37.6kg / [82.9 lbs] VFDXXXXCXXE: 40kg / [88.2 lbs] VFDXXXC63B-00: 39.0kg / [86.0 lbs] VFDXXXC63B-21: 41.1kg / [91.3 lbs]...
  • Page 71 Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A: 235kg / [518.1 lbs] VFD2800 C43A; VFD31 50C4 3A; VFD 3550 C43A; VFD450 0C43 A VFDXXXC63B-00: 243.0kg / [535.7 lbs] 235k g(51 8.1 Ibs) Figure 3-99 VFD28 00C4 3E-1; VFD3 150C 43E-1 ; VFD3550 C43E-1; VFD450 0C43 E-1 VFD2800C43E-1;...

  • Page 72: Chapter 4 Wiring

    Chapter 4 WiringC2000 Chapter 4 Wiring 4-1 System Wiring Diagram 4-2 Wiring...
  • Page 73 Chapter 4 WiringC2000 After removing the front cover, examine if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Please read following precautions before wiring.  It is crucial to cut off the AC motor drive power before any wiring installation are made.
  • Page 74 Chapter 4 WiringC2000 4-1 System Wiring Diagram Power input Please refer to Chapter 9 Specification Table in terminal user manual for detail. There may be a large inrush current during power NFB or fuse on. Refer to 7-2 NFB to select a suitable NFB or 7-3 Fuse Specification Chart.

  • Page 75: Wiring

    Chapter 4 WiringC2000 4-2 Wiring Figure 4-2 Figure 4-3 *1 Please refer to Chapter 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection...
  • Page 76 *1 Please refer to Chapter 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection. Note: When wiring for 12 Pulse Input, please strictly follow above wiring diagram, or it may cause the fan stop unexpectedly. Any questions, please contact Delta Electronics, Inc.
  • Page 77 Chapter 4 WiringC2000 MODBUS RS-485 Figure 4-5...
  • Page 78 Chapter 4 WiringC2000 4-2-1 SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) Mode Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7 Figure 4-8 Figure 4-9...
  • Page 79 Chapter 4 WiringC2000 [The page intentionally left blank]...

  • Page 80: Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals

    Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals 5-1 Main Circuit Diagram 5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals...
  • Page 81  the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta. DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output  terminals of AC motor drives.
  • Page 82 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor, external brake resistor and DC circuit This is the terminals used to connect the DC reactor to improve the power factor. For  the factory setting, it connects the short-circuit object. Please remove this short-circuit object before connecting to the DC reactor.

  • Page 83: Main Circuit Diagram

    Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 5-1 Main Circuit Diagram Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Figure 5-6 *1 Please refer to Section 7-1 for more details of brake units.
  • Page 84 *1 Please refer to Section 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection. Note: When wiring for 12 Pulse Input, please strictly follow above wiring diagram, or it may cause the fan stop unexpectedly. Any questions, please contact Delta Electronics, Inc. NOTE If the wiring between motor drive and motor is over 75 meters, please refer to Chapter 7-4 Specifications of limits for motor ...
  • Page 85 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Terminals Descriptions R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals 3-phase U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor Applicable to frame A–C +1/DC+, +2/DC+ Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. It needs to remove the jumper for installation.

  • Page 86: Specifications Of Main Circuit Terminals

    Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals Use the specified ring lug for main circuit terminal wiring. See figure 5-9 and figure 5-10 for ring lug  specifications. For other types of wiring use the wires that comply with the local regulations. After crimping the wire to the ring lug (must be UL approved), UL and CSA approved recognized ...
  • Page 87 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame Kit P/N (MAX) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MIN) (MIN) (MAX) (MAX) RNB60-8 RNB70-8 53.0 16.0 17.0 26.5 13.0 17.0 31.0 RNB80-8 RNB100-8 RNB80-8 SQNBS100-8 55.0 15.0 10.0 27.0 13.0 17.5 31.0 300MCM SQNBS150-8 SQNBS60-8 SQNBS80-8 SQNBS80-8 54.0...
  • Page 88 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame A If you install at Ta 50°C environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and  temperature resistant 75°C or 90°C. If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and ...
  • Page 89 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame B -/DC- +2/DC+ +1/DC+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 If you install at Ta 50°C environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and  temperature resistant 75°C or 90°C. If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and ...
  • Page 90 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame C -/DC- +2/DC+ +1/DC+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 If you install at Ta 50°C environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and  temperature resistant 75°C or 90°C. If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and ...
  • Page 91 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame D0 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 If you install at Ta 40°C (for model names with last digit U) / 50°C (for model names with last digit S)  environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 75°C or 90°C .
  • Page 92 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame D R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 If you install at Ta 50°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end  with 63B-00) / 40°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with 63B-21) environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 75°C or 90°C .
  • Page 93 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame E R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 If you install at Ta 50°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end  with 63B-00) / 40°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with 63B-21) environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 75°C or 90°C.
  • Page 94 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame F R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 If you install at Ta 50°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end  with 63B-00) / 40°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with 63B-21) environment, please selet copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 75°C or 90°C .
  • Page 95 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame G R/L11 R/L12 S/L21 S/L22 T/L31 T/L32 +1/DC -/DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 °C If you install at Ta 50 (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with ...
  • Page 96 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Frame H +1/DC+ -/DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L11 R/L12 S/L21 S/L22 T/L31 T/L32 If you install at Ta 50°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with ...
  • Page 97 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 [The page intentionally left blank] 5-18...

  • Page 98: Remove The Cover For Wiring

    Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Chapter 6 Control Terminals 6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring 6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal 6-3 Remove the Terminal Block...
  • Page 99 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM) Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and  keep it as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
  • Page 100 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 When the photo-coupler is using internal power supply, the switch connection for Sink  and Source as below: MI-DCM: Sink mode MI-+24V: Source mode When the photo-coupler is using external power supply, please remove the short circuit ...
  • Page 101 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring Please remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals. The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different. NOTE Frame A &...
  • Page 102 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Frame D0 & D Applicable models: VFD370C43S; VFD450C43S; VFD370C43U; VFD450C43U; VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A; VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00; VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21 Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward. Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides to remove the cover.
  • Page 103 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Frame G Applicable models: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E; VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00; VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21 Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward. Figure 6-11 Frame H Applicable models: VFD2800C43A;...
  • Page 104 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal 0-10V 0 -10 V 0- 10 V 0 -20mA O pen RC2 RB2 R A2 RB 1 AFM 1 AFM 2 A C I -10 -10V 0 -20 m A 0-2 0m A 0-10V + 24 V C OM F WD M I1...
  • Page 105 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode) Refer to parameters 02-01–02-08 to program the multi-function inputs MI1–MI8. Source mode ON: the activation current is 3.3 mA ≥ 11 V – Multi-function input 1–8 OFF: cut-off voltage ≤ 5 V Sink Mode ON: the activation current is 3.3 mA ≤...
  • Page 106 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode) Analog current input Impedance: 250Ω ACI circuit Range: 0–20mA / 4–20mA / 0–10V = 0–Max. Output Frequency (Pr. 01-00) ACI Switch, factory setting is 4–20mA Figure 6-18 internal circuit Auxiliary analog voltage input +10V Impedance: 20kΩ...
  • Page 107 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 6-3 Remove the Terminal Block 1. Loosen the screws by screwdriver. (As shown in figure below). Figure 6-21 2. Remove the control board by pulling it out for a distance 6–8 cm (as 1 in the figure) then lift the control board upward (as 2 in the figure).

  • Page 108: Chapter 7 Optional Accessories

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Chapter 7 Optional Accessories All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Non-fuse Circuit Breaker Fuse Specification Chart AC / DC Reactor Zero Phase Reactors EMC Filter Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK) Conduit Box Kit Fan Kit 7-10 Flange Mounting Kit 7-11 Power Terminal Kit...

  • Page 109: All Brake Resistors And Brake Units Used In Ac Motor Drives

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional accessories to your drive would substantially improve the drive’s performance. Please select an applicable accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion. 7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives 230V Applicable...
  • Page 110 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Applicable 125% Braking Torque 10% ED Max. Braking Torque Motor Braking Brake Resistor value Total Min. Max. Total Peak Braking Resistor for each Torque Unit spec. for each Braking Resistor Braking Power Brake Unit [kg-m] AC motor Drive Current [A] Value [Ω] Current [A]...
  • Page 111 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Applicable ＊ ＊ 125% Braking Torque / 10%ED Max. Braking Torque Motor (kW) Max. Total Min. Braking Brake Resistor value Total Peak Braking Resistor ＊ Braking Resistor series for ND HD Torque Unit spec. for each Braking Power Current...
  • Page 112 1 2.0 Figure 7-2 Table 7-6 Select the resistance value, power and brake usage (ED %) according to Delta rules. Figure 7-3 For safety, install a thermal overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in conjunction with the magnetic contactor (MC) before the drive for additional protection. The thermal overload relay protects the brake resistor from damage due to frequent or continuous braking.
  • Page 113 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Any damage to the drive or other equipment caused by using brake resistors and brake modules that are not provided by Delta voids the warranty. Consider environmental safety factors when installing the brake resistors. If you use the minimum resistance value, consult local dealers for the power calculation.

  • Page 114: Non-Fuse Circuit Breaker

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a. The rated current of the breaker shall be 1.6~2.6 times (575V / 690V models: 2~4 times) of the maximum rated input current of AC motor drive. 3-phase 230V 3-phase 460V Recommended non-fuse...

  • Page 115: Fuse Specification Chart

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-3 Fuse Specification Chart Fuse specifications lower than the table below are allowed.  For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with  the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local codes. Use UL classified fuses to fulfill this requirement.
  • Page 116 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Input Current I [A] Line Fuse 575V Model Normal Heavy Light Duty I [A] Model No. Supplier Duty Duty VFD015C53A-21 KLKD007.T Littelfuse VFD022C53A-21 KLKD010.T Littelfuse VFD037C53A-21 10.4 KLKD015.T Littelfuse VFD055C53A-21 14.9 12.3 10.7 25ET Bussmann VFD075C53A-21 16.9 12.5 32ET...

  • Page 117: Ac / Dc Reactor

    Install an AC input reactor in series with the main power to the three input phases R S T as shown below: Wiring of AC input reactor Figure 7-6 Following table shows the standard AC reactors specification of Delta C2000 200V~230V/ 50~60Hz Rated Current Saturation current...
  • Page 118 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 380V~460V/ 50~60Hz Rated Current Saturation current Built-in Input AC reactor Model impedance impedance (Arms) (Arms) DC reactor Delta part # (mH) (mH) 5.22 8.102 13.502 DR003A0810 VFD007C43A 6.84 6.077 10.127 DR004A0607 VFD015C43A 10.26 4.050 6.752 DR006A0405 VFD022C43A 14.58...
  • Page 119 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 690V, 50/60 Hz, 3-phase Rated current Saturation Current 3% Impedance 5% Impedance (Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH) Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty...
  • Page 120 Tightening torque: 6.1~8.2 kg-cm / [5.3~7.1 lb-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm] Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Unit: mm Input AC reactor Model D1*D2 PE D Delta part # DR005A0254 VFD007C23A DR008A0159 6*12 80.5 VFD015C23A DR011A0115 6*12 80.5...
  • Page 121 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm Input AC reactor Model D1*D2 PE D Delta part # DR049AP215 6*12 1.2~1.4 VFD110C23A DR065AP163 6*12 2.5~3.0 VFD150C23A Table 7-20 7-14...
  • Page 122 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm Input AC reactor D1*D2 Model Delta part # VFD185C23A DR075AP170 7*13 20*3 VFD220C23A DR090AP141 7*13 20*3 VFD300C23A DR146AP087 7*13 20*3 VFD370C23A VFD450C23A DR180AP070 11*18 30*3 VFD550C23A DR215AP059 11*18 30*5 Table 7-21 7-15...
  • Page 123 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm Input AC reactor D1*D2 Model Delta part # VFD750C23A DR276AP049 10*18 30*5 VFD900C23A DR349AP037 10*18 30*5 Table 7-22 7-16...
  • Page 124 Tightening torque: 6.1~8.2 kg-cm / [5.3~7.1 lb-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm] Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Unit: mm Input AC reactor Model D1*D2 PE D Delta part # DR003A0810 VFD007C43A DR004A0607 6*12 80.5 VFD015C43A DR006A0405 6*12 VFD022C43A...
  • Page 125 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm Input AC reactor D1*D2 PE D Model Delta part # DR038AP639 6*12 1.2~1.4 VFD185C43A DR045AP541 7*13 1.2~1.4 VFD220C43A Table 7-24 7-18...
  • Page 126 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm Input AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # DR060AP405 7*13 20*3 VFD300C43A DR073AP334 11*18 20*3 VFD370C43S/U DR091AP267 11*18 20*3 VFD450C43S/U DR110AP221 10*18 20*3 VFD550C43A Table 7-25 7-19...
  • Page 127 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm Input AC reactor D1*D2 Model Delta part # DR150AP162 10*18 30*3 VFD750C43A DR180AP135 11*22 30*3 VFD900C43A DR220AP110 11*22 30*5 VFD1100C43A DR260AP098 11*22 30*5 VFD1320C43A DR310AP078 11*22 30*5 VFD1600C43A DR370AP066 11*22 40*3 VFD1850C43A Table 7-26...
  • Page 128 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm Input AC reactor D1*D2 Model Delta part # VFD2200C43A DR460AP054 12*20 50*5 VFD2800C43A DR550AP044 12*20 50*5 VFD3150C43A DR616AP039 12*20 50*8 VFD3550C43A DR683AP036 12*20 50*8 VFD4500C43A DR866AP028 12*20 50*8 Table 7-27 7-21...
  • Page 129 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 DC reactor A DC reactor can also improve the power factor, reduce input current, and reduce interference generated from the motor drive. A DC reactor stabilizes the DC BUS voltage. Compared to an AC input reactor, the advantages are smaller size, lower price, and lower voltage drop (lower power dissipation). Installation Install the DC reactor between terminals +2/DC+ and +1/DC+.
  • Page 130 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 DC reactor dimension and specifications: 200V~230V/ 50~60Hz Rated Current Saturation current DC reactor DC reactor Model [mm] [mm] [mm] (Arms) (Arms) (mH) Delta Part # [mm] [mm] [mm] 64±2 56±2 VFD007C23A 8.64 5.857 DR005D0585 9.5*5.5 64±2 56±2 VFD015C23A 12.78...
  • Page 131 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 380V~460V/ 50~60Hz Rated Current Saturation current DC reactor DC reactor Model (Arms) (Arms) (mH) Delta Part # [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] VFD007C43A 5.22 18.709 DR003D1870 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5 VFD015C43A 6.84 14.031 DR004D1403 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5...
  • Page 132 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Following table is the THDi value of Delta motor drive matching AC/DC reactor: Drive Spec. Models without built-in DC reactor Models with built-in DC reactor No AC/DC No AC/DC Reactor 3% input AC 5% input AC...
  • Page 133 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Following table shows the standard AC output reactors specification of Delta C2000 200V~230V/ 50~60Hz Rated Current Saturation Built-in DC Input AC reactor Delta impedance impedance Model (Arms) current (Arms) reactor part # (mH) (mH) VFD007C23A 8.64 2.536...
  • Page 134 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Saturation Rated Current Built-in Model current impedance impedance Delta part # (Arms) DC reactor (Arms) (mH) (mH) VFD1100C43A 376.2 0.110 0.184 DR220LP110 VFD1320C43A 444.6 0.098 0.162 DR260LP098 VFD1600C43A 0.078 0.131 DR310LP078 VFD1850C43A 633.6 0.066 0.109 DR370LP066 VFD2200C43A 786.6...
  • Page 135 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 AC output reactor dimensions and specification: Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD007C23A DR005A0254 VFD015C23A DR008A0159 6*12 80.5 VFD022C23A DR011A0115 6*12 80.5 VFD037C23A DR017AP746 6*12 80.5 VFD055C23A DR025AP507 6*12 VFD075C23A DR033AP320 6*12 Table 7-36...
  • Page 136 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD110C23A DR049AP215 6*12 1.2-1.4 VFD150C23A DR065AP162 6*12 2.5-3.0 Table 7-37 7-29...
  • Page 137 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD185C23A DR075AP170 7*13 20*3 VFD220C23A DR090AP141 7*13 20*3 VFD300C23A DR146AP087 7*13 30*3 VFD370C23A VFD450C23A DR180AP070 11*18 30*5 VFD550C23A DR215AP059 11*18 30*5 Table 7-38 7-30...
  • Page 138 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD750C23A DR276AP049 10*18 30*5 VFD900C23A DR276AP050 10*18 30*5 Table 7-39 7-31...
  • Page 139 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD007C43A DR003A0810 VFD015C43A DR004A0607 6*12 VFD022C43A DR006A0405 6*12 VFD037C43A DR009A0270 6*12 VFD040C43A DR010A0231 6*12 VFD055C43A DR012A0202 6*12 VFD075C43A DR018A0117 6*12 VFD110C43A DR024AP881 6*12 VFD150C43A DR032AP660 6*12 Table 7-40...
  • Page 140 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD185C43A DR038AP639 6*12 VFD220C43A DR045AP541 7*13 Table 7-41 7-33...
  • Page 141 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD300C43A DR060AP405 240 228 215 7*13 20*3 VFD370C43S/U DR073AP334 250 235 235 115 11*18 20*3 VFD450C43S/U DR091AP267 250 240 235 115 11*18 20*3 VFD550C43A DR110AP221 270 260 245...
  • Page 142 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD750C43A DR150LP162 270 264 265 192 125 10*18 176 200 118 30*3 VFD900C43A DR180LP135 300 295 310 195 125 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*3 VFD1100C43A DR220LP110 300 298 310...
  • Page 143 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Output AC reactor Model D1*D2 Delta part # VFD2200C43A DR460AP054 360 355 510 12*20 50*5 VFD2800C43A DR550AP044 360 355 510 12*20 50*5 VFD3150C43A DR616AP039 360 355 510 12*20 50*8 VFD3550C43A DR683AP036 360 355 510 12*20 50*8...
  • Page 144 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Motor Cable Length 1. Leakage current to affect the motor and counter measurement If the cable length is too long, the parasitic capacitance between cables will enlarge and may increase leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, and increased leakage current will not ensure the correction of current value in display.
  • Page 145 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Without AC reactor With AC reactor Rated current 460V Model Shielded Cable Non-shielded Shielded Cable Non-shielded (ND) (Arms) [meter] cable [meter] [meter] cable [meter] VFD007C43A VFD015C43A VFD022C43A VFD037C43A VFD040C43A 10.5 VFD055C43A VFD075C43A VFD110C43A VFD150C43A VFD185C43A VFD220C43A VFD300C43A VFD370C43S/U VFD450C43S/U...
  • Page 146 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Rated 575V Without AC reactor With AC reactor Current Normal Shielded Shielded Non-shielded Non-shielded Model Duty Cable Cable Cable [meter] Cable [meter] (Arms) [meter] [meter] VFD015C53A-21 0.75 VFD022C531-21 VFD037C53A-21 VFD055C53A-21 VFD075C53A-21 VFD110C53A-21 15.5 VFD150C53A-21 Table 7-48 Rated 690V Without AC reactor...
  • Page 147 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Figure 7-9 The t is defined as: Figure 7-10 Sine-wave filter When there is longer cable length connected between motor drive and motor, the damping will lead to high frequency resonator, and make impedance matching poor to enlarge the voltage reflection. This phenomenon will generate twice-input voltage in motor side, which will easily make motor voltage overshoot to damage insulation.
  • Page 148 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 AC motor drive Wiring of non-shielded cable AC motor drive Wiring of shielded cable Following table shows the sin-wave filter specification of Delta C2000 200V~230V/ 50~60Hz Output cable length [m] Rated current (Arms) Suggested sine-wave filter part # (Shielded or non-shielded) 0.75...
  • Page 149 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 380V~460V/ 50~60Hz Output cable length [m] Rated current (Arms) Suggested sine-wave filter part # (Shielded or non-shielded) 0.75 B84143V0004R227 B84143V0006R227 B84143V0011R227 10.5 B84143V0016R227 B84143V0025R227 1000 B84143V0033R227 18.5 B84143V0050R227 B84143V0066R227 B84143V0075R227 B84143V0095R227 B84143V0132R227 B84143V0180R227 B84143V0180R227 B84143V0250R227 B84143V0320R227 1000 Please contact supplier EPCOS Table 7-51...
  • Page 150 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Please refer to website: Sine wave filter part # http://en.tdk.eu/inf/30/db/emc_2014/B84143V_R227.pdf B84143V0075R227 :75A, Sine-wave output filters for 3-phase systems B84143V0095R227 :95A, Sine-wave output filters for 3-phase systems B84143V0132R227 :132A, Sine-wave output filters for 3-phase systems B84143V0180R227 :180A, Sine-wave output filters for 3-phase systems B84143V0250R227 :250A, Sine-wave output filters for 3-phase systems B84143V0320R227...
  • Page 151 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-5 Zero Phase Reactors Reactor Wiring Recommended Wire Size Corresponding motor drives model (Note) Method VFD007C23A; VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A; VFD007C43A; VFD015C43A; RF008X00A ≤ 8 AWG ≤ 8.37 mm Diagram A VFD022C43A; VFD037C43A; VFD040C43A; 1C*3 VFD055C43A; VFD015C53A-21; 4C*1 VFD022C53A-21;...
  • Page 152 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Diagram A Please put all wires through at least one core without winding. Diagram B Diagram C Diagram D 7-45...

  • Page 153: Zero Phase Reactor

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Diagram E Note 1: The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted, i.e. the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase reactors.
  • Page 154 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Unit: mm [inch] Model G(Ø) Torque 36.5 56.5 RF008X00A < 10kgf/cm [3.858] [2.874] [1.437] [1.142] [2.224] [3.386] [0.217] 87.5 43.5 RF004X00A < 10kgf/cm [4.331] [3.445] [1.713] [1.417] [2.087] [3.780] [0.217] Table 7-56 Unit: mm [inch] Model G(Ø) Torque 172.5...
  • Page 155 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Magnetic Ring Model number: T60006-L2040-W453 Model number: T60006-L2050-W565 Model number: T60006-L2160-V066 7-48...
  • Page 156 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Model number: T60004-L2016-W620 Model number: T60004-L2025-W622 7-49...

  • Page 157: Emc Filter

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-6 EMC Filter Following table is the external EMC filter of C2000 series, user can choose corresponding zero phase reactor and suitable shielded cable length in accord to required noise emission and electromagnetic interference level to have the best configuration to suppress the electromagnetic interference. When the application does not consider RE and only needs CE to comply with C2 or C1, there is no need to install zero phase reactor in input side.
  • Page 158 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 460V model Conducted Radiation C2000 Zero phase reactor Emission Emission Output Filter model name Rated shielded (U/V/W) input Input side Output side cable length EN61800-3 Frame Model current (R/S/T) (U/V/W) VFD007C43A VFD015C43A EMF014A43A RF008X00A RF008X00A VFD022C43A VFD037C43A T60006L2040W453 T60006L2040W453...
  • Page 159 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Conducted Radiation C2000 Zero phase reactor Emission Emission Filter model name Carrier Output shielded Rated Input Output (U/V/W) Frequency cable length Input side Frame Model Current side EN61800-3 (R/S/T) (U/V/W) EN618000-3 C2 VFD370C43S/U B84143A0120R105 VFD450C43S/U ≤6kHz VFD550C43A B84143B0180S080 VFD750C43A...
  • Page 160 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 690V models conducted and radiated emission C2-motor cable C3-motor cable length-50m length-100m Frame Model Filter model name Zero phase reactor Location of zero phase reactor (Refer to below figure shown) VFD015C53A-21 VFD022C53A-21 EMF014A63A VFD037C53A-21 VFD055C53A-21 T60006L2040W453 VFD075C53A-21 EMF027A63A VFD110C53A-21...
  • Page 161 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC Filter Dimension EMC filter model name: EMF021A23A, EMF014A43A 7-54...
  • Page 162 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: EMF018A43A 7-55...
  • Page 163 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: EMF056A23A, EMF039A43A 7-56...
  • Page 164 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: KMF370A, KMF3100A EMC filter model name: B84143D0150R127 7-57...
  • Page 165 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: B84143D0200R127 7-58...
  • Page 166 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: B84143B0250S020 7-59...
  • Page 167 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: B84143B0400S020 EMC filter model name: B84143B1000S020 7-60...
  • Page 168 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: EMF014A63A Unit: mm [inch] 7-61...
  • Page 169 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: EMF027A63A Unit: mm [inch] 7-62...
  • Page 170 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: B84143A0050R021 Unit: mm 7-63...
  • Page 171 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: B84143A0080R021 Unit: mm 7-64...
  • Page 172 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: B84143B0150S021 EMC filter model name: B84143B0250S021 7-65...
  • Page 173 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 EMC filter model name: B84143B0400S021 Unit: mm EMC filter model name: B84143B1000S021 Unit: mm 7-66...
  • Page 174 By using an EMC filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMC filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
  • Page 175 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Choose suitable motor cable and precautions Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMC filter. Be sure to observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable. 1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best). 2.
  • Page 176 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Capacitor Filter Capacitor Filter is a simple filter accessory, installed to provide simple filtering and eliminating interference. Installation Installed on the input side, connect each cable on terminal R, S, T and PE. As shown in the figure below. (Please do NOT install the capacitor filter on the output side.) Capacitor Filter...

  • Page 177: Panel Mounting

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-7 Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK) For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP66. Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01) Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting accessories*1 accessories*2 Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm Torque: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.7~10.4 lb-in.] / Torque: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.7~10.4 lb-in.] /...
  • Page 178 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting     7-71...

  • Page 179: Conduit Box Kit

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-8 Conduit Box Kit Appearance  Conduit box kit is optional for VFDXXXCXXA (Frame D and above) and VFDXXXC43S, the protection will be IP20/ NEMA1/ UL TYPE1 after installation. Frame D0 Applicable models VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450SC43S/43U Model number『MKC-D0N1CB』 ITEM Description Qty.
  • Page 180 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame F Applicable models VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21 Model number『MKC-FN1CB』 ITEM Description Qty. Screw M5*0.8*10L Bushing Rubber28 Bushing Rubber 44 Bushing Rubber 100 Conduit box cover Conduit box base Table 7-70 Frame G Applicable models VFD1850C43A/43E;...
  • Page 181 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame H Applicable models VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A; VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E; VFD4500C43E; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1 Model number『MKC-HN1CB』 ITEM Description Qty. Screw M6*1.0*25L ITEM 1 Screw M8*1.25*30L ITEM 2 NUT M8 ITEM 3 ITEM 14 NUT M10 ITEM 4 Bushing Rubber 28 Bushing Rubber 44...
  • Page 182 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Conduit Box Installation  Frame D0 Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm] Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure.
  • Page 183 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Fasten the 2 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm] Frame D Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure.
  • Page 184 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] Fasten the 2 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm] Frame E 1.
  • Page 185 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position. Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] 3. Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm] Frame F Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the...
  • Page 186 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure Screw 9~12 torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm] Screw 13~16 torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] 7-79...
  • Page 187 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame G On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure.
  • Page 188 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Install the conduit box by fastening all the screws shown in the following figure. M5 Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] M8 Screw torque: 100~120 kg-cm / [86.7~104.1 Ib-in.] / [9.8~11.8 Nm] Fasten all the screws.
  • Page 189 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure). Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm] 7-82...
  • Page 190 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame H Assembly for Frame H3 (Conduit Box) Loosen the 3 screws and remove the cover of conduit box H3 as preparation. Loosen the screws as below figure shown. 7-83...
  • Page 191 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Fasten the M6 screws to locations shown in the following figure. Screw Torque: 35~45 kg-cm / [30.3~39 Ib-in.] / [3.4~4.4 Nm] Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure. Screw 1~6: M6 screw torque: 55~65 kg-cm / [47.7~56.4 Ib-in] / [5.4~6.4 Nm] Screw 7~9: M8 screw torque: 100~110 kg-cm / [86.7~95.4 Ib-in] / [9.8~10.8 Nm] Screw 10~13: M10 screw torque: 250~300 kg-cm / [216.9~260.3 Ib-in] / [24.5~29.4 Nm] Screw 14~17: M8 screw torque: 100~110 kg-cm / [86.7~95.4 Ib-in] / [9.8~10.8 Nm]...
  • Page 192 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Fasten the 3 covers and screws, which were loosen from step 1, to the original location. Screw Torque: 35~45 kg-cm / [30.3~39 Ib-in.] / [3.4~4.4 Nm] Installation complete. 7-85...
  • Page 193 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Assembly for Frame H2 (Straight Stand) Loosen the 3 screws and remove the cover of conduit box. Remove the 4 covers of conduit box, and fasten the loosen screws back to the original location. Screw Torque: 100~110 kg-cm / [86.7~95.4 Ib-in] / [9.8~10.8 Nm] Remove the parts and screws as below figure shown.
  • Page 194 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Fasten the M6 screws to locations shown in below figure. Screw Torque: 35~45 kg-cm / [30.3~39 Ib-in.] / [3.4~4.4 Nm] Install conduit box and accessories by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure. Screw 1~6: M6 screw torque: 55~65 kg-cm / [47.7~56.4 Ib-in] / [5.4~6.4 Nm] Screw 7~9: M8 screw torque: 100~110 kg-cm / [86.7~95.4 Ib-in] / [9.8~10.8 Nm] Screw 10~13: M10 screw torque: 250~300 kg-cm / [216.9~260.3 Ib-in] / [24.5~29.4 Nm] Screw 14~17: M8 screw torque: 100~110 kg-cm / [86.7~95.4 Ib-in] / [9.8~10.8 Nm]...
  • Page 195 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 6. Installation complete. 7-88...

  • Page 196: Fan Kit

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-9 Fan Kit Frames of the fan kit  NOTE: The fan does not support hot swap function. For replacement, turn the power off before replacing the fan. Heat sink Fan Model ”MKC-AFKM” Frame A Applicable Model VFD015C23A;...
  • Page 197 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-CFKB1” Frame C Applicable Model VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-CFKB2” Frame C Applicable Model VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E Heat sink Fan “MKC-CFKM” Frame C Following Model use one set of MKC-CFKM: VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A Following Model use two sets of MKC-CFKM: VFD150C23A;...
  • Page 198 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Heat sink Fan Model Capacitor Fan Model Frame D “MKC-DFKM” “MKC-DFKB” Applicable Model VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00; VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21 Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-EFKM1” Frame E Applicable Model VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E Heat sink Fan Model ”MKC-EFKM2” Frame E Applicable Model VFD750C23A/23E;...
  • Page 199 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-EFKB” Frame E Applicable Model VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E; VFD750C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21 Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-FFKM” Frame F Applicable Model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21 Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-FFKB”...
  • Page 200 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-HFKM” Frame H Applicable Model Following models use 2 sets of MKC-HFKM fan kit. VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E; VFD3550C43A/43E; VFD4500C43A/43E; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1 Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-HFKM1” Frame H Applicable Model Following models use two sets of MKC-HFKM1: VFD4000C63B-00;...
  • Page 201 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Fan Removal  Frame A Model “MKC-AFKM” : Heat Sink Fan Applicable model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E; VFD015C53A-21; VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21 1. Refer to Figure 1, press the tabs on both side of the 2.
  • Page 202 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame B Model ”MKC-BFKB” Capacitor Fan Applicable model VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E; VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21 Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan by using flathead screwdriver. (As shown in the larger picture) Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan by flathead screwdriver Pay attention to direction of the...
  • Page 203 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 (As shown in Figure 2), remove the power connector, loosen the screw and remove the fan kit. When installing the fan kit, have the label on the fan kit facing inside of the motor drive. Screw’s torque force: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.7~10.4 lb-in.] / [1.0~1.2 Nm] Figure 2 Frame C Model “MKC-CFKB1”...
  • Page 204 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame D0 Model “MKC-DFKB” Capacitor Fan Applicable model VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450C43S/43U Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the tab on the right (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3, press the tab on the right and left to remove the cover, follow the direction the and the left to remove the cover.
  • Page 205 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame D Model “MKC-DFKB” Capacitor Fan Applicable model VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00; VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21 (Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the tab on (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3 & 4, press the tab on the right the right and the left to remove the cover, follow the and the left to remove the cover.
  • Page 206 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame E Applicable model Applicable for MKC-EFKM1: VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E Applicable for MKC-EFKM2: VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E Applicable for MKC-EFKM3: VFD750C63B-00; VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21 Applicable for MKC-EFKB: VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E; VFD750C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-00; VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-21;...
  • Page 207 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame F Applicable model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21 Fan model “MKC-FFKM” Heat Sink Fan Loosen the screws and plug out the power of fan before removing (figure 1). Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] Figure 1 Fan model “MKC-FFKB”...
  • Page 208 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame G Applicable model VFD1850C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43; VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00; VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21 For 1~8 shown in the figure 2: Loosen the screws Fan model “MKC-GFKM” Heat Sink Fan Screw torque: 35~40 kg-cm / [30.4~34.7 Ib-in.] / Loosen the screw (figure 1) and remove the cover. [3.4~3.9 Nm] Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13.1 Ib-in.] / For 9~11 shown in the figure 2: Loosen the screws and...
  • Page 209 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame H Applicable model VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E; VFD3550C43A/43E; VD4500C43A/43E; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1 Loosen the screw 5~12 and remove the top cover (figure Fan model “MKC-HFKM” Heat Sink Fan 2). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / Loosen the screw 1~4 and remove the top cover (figure 1) [2.4~2.5 Nm] Screw torque: 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.9 Ib-in.] /...
  • Page 210 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame H Applicable model VFD4000C63B-00; VFD4000C63B-21 Loosen the screw 1~8 and remove the top cover (figure 2). Fan model “MKC-HFKM1” Heat Sink Fan Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / Loosen the screw 1~4 and remove the top cover (figure 1) [2.4~2.5 Nm] Screw torque: 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.9 Ib-in.] / [1.4~1.6 Nm]...
  • Page 211 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame H Applicable model VFD4500C63B-00; VFD5600C63B-00; VFD6300C63B-00; VFD4500C63B-21; VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21 Loosen the screw 1~8 and remove the top cover (figure 2). Fan model “MKC-HFKM1” Heat Sink Fan Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / Loosen the screw 1~4 and remove the top cover (figure 1) [2.4~2.5 Nm] Screw torque: 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.9 Ib-in.] / [1.4~1.6 Nm]...

  • Page 212: Flange Mounting Kit

    Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-10 Flange Mounting Kit Applicable Models, Frame A~F Frame A 『MKC-AFM1』 Applicable model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD015C53A-21; VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21 Screw 1 *4 M3*P 0.5; L=6mm Screw 2*8 M6*P 1.0; L=16mm Accessories 1*1 Accessories 2*2 Accessories 3*2 『MKC-AFM』...
  • Page 213 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 『 MKC-AFM1 』 Installation Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1 (M3) (figure 1). Screw torque: 6~8 kg-cm / [5.21~6.94 Ib-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm] Figure 1 Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2 (M6) (figure 2). Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] Figure 2 Install accessory 2 &...
  • Page 214 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 『 MKC-AFM 』 Installation Fasten screw*2 (M6) and accessory 2 & 3. Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] (figure 1) Figure 1 Fasten screw*2 (M6) and accessory 2 & 3. Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] (figure 2) Figure 2 Plate installation, place 4 of the screw *4 (M6) through accessory 2 &...
  • Page 215 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame B 『MKC-BFM』 Applicable model VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E; VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21 Screw 1 *4 ~ M8*P 1.25; Screw 2*6 ~ M6*P 1.0 Accessory 1*2 Accessory 2*2 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-108...
  • Page 216 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-109...
  • Page 217 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 『 MKC-BFM 』 Installation Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1 (M8). Screw torque: 40~45 kg-cm / [34.7~39.0 Ib-in.] / [3.9~4.4 Nm] (As shown in the following figure) Plate installation, place 6 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1 & 2 and the plate then fasten the screws. Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] (As shown in the following figure) 7-110...
  • Page 218 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame C 『MKC-CFM』 Applicable model VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E; VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21; VFD300C63B-21; VFD370C63B-21 Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25; Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0 Accessory 1*2 Accessory 2*2 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-111...
  • Page 219 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-112...
  • Page 220 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 『 MKC-CFM 』 Installation Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 50~55 kg-cm / [43.4~47.7 Ib-in.] / [4.9~5.4 Nm] (As shown in the following figure) Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through Accessory 1 & 2 and the plate then fasten the screws. Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] (As shown in the following figure) 7-113...
  • Page 221 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame D0 Applicable model VFD370C43S/U; VFD450C43S/U Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] M10*P1.5(4X) 11.0[0.43](4X) 7-114...
  • Page 222 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame D Applicable model VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00; VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] M10*P1.5(4X) 11.0[0.43](4X) 7-115...
  • Page 223 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame E Applicable model VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E; VFD750C63B-00; VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-116...
  • Page 224 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame D0 & D & E 1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown the following figure). in the following figure). Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
  • Page 225 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame F Applicable model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] M12*P1.75(4X) 13.0[0.51](4X) 7-118...
  • Page 226 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Frame F 1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. 2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm] FIXTURE 2 FIXTURE2 3. Loosen screw 13 ~26 and remove Fixture 1. Install Fixture 1 by fasten screw 13 ~26 Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]...
  • Page 227 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 7-11 Power Terminal Kit 『MKC-PTCG』 (Applicable for Frame G models-VFDXXXCXXA) Applicable model VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A (The MKC-PTCG is optional for the above models, after installation, the 12 plus will be 6 plus.) Accessories Diagram of power terminal connection M12 Torque: 408 kg-cm / [354.1 lb-in] / [39.98 Nm] Item Description...
  • Page 228 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 3. Loosen the upper M8 nuts (1~6) with a sleeve wrench (12mm of the sleeve). M8 Torque: 90kg / [78.1 lb-in] / [8.8 Nm] 4. Install the 3pcs copper assy., as shown in the following figure 1. Fasten the upper M8 nuts (1~6) with a sleeve wrench (12mm of the sleeve), as shown in the figure 2 below.

  • Page 229: Usb/Rs-485 Communication Interface Ifd6530

    RJ-45 in RS485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension, handy use of plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABG products to your PC. Applicable Models: All DELTA IABG products.
  • Page 230 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000  RJ-45 Description Description Reserved Reserved Reserved 3. Preparations before Driver Installation Please extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. You could find driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) in the CD supplied with IFD6530. Note: DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3...
  • Page 231 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 4. Driver Installation After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps. 7-124...
  • Page 232 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 5. LED Display 1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON. 2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting. 7-125...
  • Page 233 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 [This page intentionally left blank] 7-126...

  • Page 234: Chapter 8 Option Cards

    -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP 8-13 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet 8-14 CMC-EIP01 -- Communication card, EtherNet/IP 8-15 CMC-EC01 -- Communication card, EtherCAT 8-16 CMC-PN01 -- Communication card, PROFINET 8-17 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen 8-18 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables...

  • Page 235: Option Card Installation

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Please select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion. To prevent drive damage during installation, please remove the digital keypad and the cover before wiring. Refer to the following instruction. 8-1 Option Card Installation 8-1-1 Remove covers Frame A–C Screw Torque: 8–10 kg-cm / [6.9–8.7 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]...
  • Page 236 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Frame E Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm] Frame F Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm] Frame G Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]...
  • Page 237 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Frame H Screw Torque: 14–16 kg-cm / [12.15–13.89 lb-in.] / [1.4–1.6 Nm] 8-1-2 Option Card Installation Location 1 RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad KPC-CC01 Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on ○ KPC-CC01. Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on ○...
  • Page 238 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 I/O & Relay extension card (Slot 3) EMC-D42A EMC-R6AA EMC-BPS01 EMC-D611A EMC-A22A...
  • Page 239 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 PG card (Slot 2) EMC-PG01O / EMC-PG02O EMC-PG01L / EMC-PG02L EMC-PG01U / EMC-PG02U EMC-PG01R...
  • Page 240 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Communication extension card (Slot 1) CMC-PD01 CMC-DN01 CMC-MOD01 / CMC-EIP01 EMC-COP01 CMC-EC01 CMC-PN01...
  • Page 241 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-1-3 Installation and Disconnection of Extension Card 8-1-3-1 Installation Communication card: EMC-COP01, CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-DN01, CMC-PD01, CMC-EC01, CMC-PN01...
  • Page 242 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 I/O & Relay Card: EMC-D42A, EMC-D611A, EMC-R6AA, EMC-BPS01, EMC-A22A...
  • Page 243 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 PG Card: EMC-PG01U, EMC-PG01R, EMC-PG01L, EMC-PG01O 8-10...
  • Page 244 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-1-3-2 Disconnecting the extension card Communication card: EMC-COP01, CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-DN01, CMC-PD01, CMC-EC01, CMC-PN01 8-11...
  • Page 245 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 I/O & Relay card: EMC-D42A, EMC-D611A, EMC-R6AA, EMC-BPS01, EMC-A22A 8-12...
  • Page 246 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 PG card: EMC-PG01U, EMC-PG01R, EMC-PG01L, EMC-PG01O 8-13...

  • Page 247: Emc-D42A -- Extension Card For 4-Point Digital Input / 2-Point Digital Input

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-2 EMC-D42A -- Extension card for 4-point digital input/ 2-point digital input Terminals Descriptions Common for Multi-function input terminals Select SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) in J1 jumper / external power supply Refer to parameters 02-26–02-29 to program the multi-function inputs MI10–MI13.

  • Page 248: Emc-A22A -- Extension Card For 2-Point Analog Input/ 2-Point Analog Output

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-5 EMC-A22A -- Extension card for 2-point analog input/ 2-point analog output Terminals Descriptions Refer to Pr. 14-00–Pr. 14-01 for function selection (input), and Pr. 14-18–Pr. 14-19 for mode selection. There are two sets of AI port, SSW3 (AI10) and SSW4 (AI11), AI10, AI11 which can be switched to Voltage or Current mode.
  • Page 249 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-7 EMC-PG01L / EMC-PG02L -- PG card (Line driver) 8-7-1 Terminal description Set by Pr.10-00–10-02 – , Pr.10-16 10-18 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal Encoder input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector) Open Collector input voltage: +5–+24V (Note 1) A1, /A1, B1,...
  • Page 250 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 PG2 Wiring Diagram 8-17...
  • Page 251 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-7-2 EMC-PG01L / EMC-PG02L Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any  high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21–0.81mm [AWG24–AWG18].
  • Page 252 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-8 EMC-PG01O / EMC-PG02O -- PG card (Open collector) 8-8-1 Terminal descriptions Set by Pr.10-00–10-02, Pr.10-16–10-18 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal Encoder Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector) Open Collector Input Voltage: +5V–+24V (Note 1) A1, /A1, B1,...
  • Page 253 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 PG1 card wiring diagram (the image 1 and 2 below are wiring diagrams of Open Collector encoder) PG2 Wiring Diagram 8-20...
  • Page 254 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-8-2 EMC-PG01O / EMC-PG02O Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any  high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21–0.81mm [AWG24–AWG18].
  • Page 255 1. FSW1 S: Standard UVW Output Encoder; D: Delta Encoder 2. When using the Delta Encoder, wait for at least 250ms after powering up to receive signals from UVW. If a running command is received before UVW signals finish, a PGF5 error message will be given.
  • Page 256 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-9-2 EMC-PG01U / EMC-PG02U Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any  high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21–0.81mm [AWG24–AWG18].

  • Page 257: Emc-Pg01R -- Pg Card (Resolver)

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-10 EMC-PG01R -- PG card (Resolver) 8-10-1 Terminal Descriptions Set by Pr.10-00–10-02 and Pr.10-30 Resolver. (Pr.10-00=3, Pr.10-01=1024) Terminals Descriptions Resolver Output Power R1- R2 7Vrms, 10kHz Resolver Input Signal (S2, /S4=Sin; S1, /S3=Cos) S1, /S3, S2, /S4, 3.5±0.175Vrms, 10kHz Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector) A2, /A2,...
  • Page 258 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-10-2 EMC-PG01R Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any  high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21–0.81mm [AWG24–AWG18].  Cable length: PG1 input, less than 30m;...

  • Page 259: Cmc-Mod01 -- Communication Card, Modbus Tcp

    Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP, Network protocol Delta Configuration Electrical Specification Power supply voltage (supply by the AC motor drive) Insulation voltage 500V Power consumption 0.8W...
  • Page 260 The operation command is controlled by Pr. 00-21 command setting communication card. Decoding method for Pr. 09-30 Decoding method for Delta AC motor drive communication Pr. 09-75 IP setting Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1) Pr. 09-76 IP address -1 IP address 192.168.1.5...
  • Page 261 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-11-6 LED Indicator & Troubleshooting LED Indicators Status Indication How to correct it? Power supply in normal status POWER Green No power supply Check the power supply Network connection in normal status Flashes Network in operation LINK Green Check if the network cable is...

  • Page 262: Cmc-Pd01 -- Communication Card, Profibus Dp

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-12 CMC-PD01 -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP 8-12-1 Features Supports PZD control data exchange. Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters. Supports user diagnosis function. Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12Mbps. 8-12-2 Product Profile 1. NET indicator 2.
  • Page 263 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Environment ESD(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2) EFT(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6) – Operation: -10ºC 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation /storage – Storage: -25ºC 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity) Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC60068-2-6 (TEST Fc) / IEC61131-2 &...

  • Page 264: Cmc-Dn01 -- Communication Card, Devicenet

    8-13 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet 8-13-1 Functions Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct immediate control to AC motor drive. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange. For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
  • Page 265 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Electrical Specification Power supply voltage (supplied by AC motor drive) Insulation voltage 500V Communication wire 0.85W power consumption Power consumption Weight Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6) Operation: -10ºC –50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation /storage...
  • Page 266 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 NS LED LED status Indication How to correct it? 1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the connection is normal. No power supply or CMC-DN01 has 2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the not completed MAC ID test yet.

  • Page 267: Cmc-Eip01 -- Communication Card, Ethernet/Ip

    1 Port Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS over TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Delta Network protocol Configuration Electrical Specification Weight Insulation voltage 500V Power consumption 0.8W...
  • Page 268 Source of operation The operation command is controlled by Pr. 00-21 command setting communication card. Decoding method for The decoding method for Delta AC motor Pr. 09-30 communication drive Pr. 09-75 IP setting Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1) Pr.
  • Page 269 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Parameter Function Set value (Dec) Explanation Pr. 09-80 Netmask -1 Netmask 255.255.255.0 Pr. 09-81 Netmask -2 Netmask 255.255.255.0 Pr. 09-82 Netmask -3 Netmask 255.255.255.0 Pr. 09-83 Netmask -4 Netmask 255.255.255.0 Pr. 09-84 Default gateway -1 Default gateway 192.168.1.1 Pr.
  • Page 270 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Abnormality Cause How to correct it? Able to open Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is CMC-EIP01 setup correct. For the Intranet setting in your company, Incorrect network setting in page but fail to please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting CMC-EIP01 utilize webpage in your home, please refer to the network setting...

  • Page 271: Cmc-Ec01 -- Communication Card, Ethercat

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-15 CMC-EC01 -- Communication card, EtherCAT 8-15-1 Features The EtherCAT of C2000 currently provides standard control mode of CiA402 Velocity (Index 6060=2), but it is non-synchronous control mode. There is no need to turn on the DC (Distribute Clock) function when operating.
  • Page 272 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6) – Operation -10°C 15°C (temperature), 90% (humidity) – Storage -25°C 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity) Vibration / shock International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 61800-5-1,...
  • Page 273 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 Status Indication Basic configuration error (On / Off 200ms) Status switching error Flashed (On 200ms / Off 1000ms) ERROR Times out (On 200ms twice / Off 1000ms) No error Network connection in normal status IN LINK Green Flashes Network in operation...

  • Page 274: Cmc-Pn01 -- Communication Card, Profinet

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-16 CMC-PN01 -- Communication card, PROFINET 8-16-1 Features CMC-PN01 connects C2000 drive to PROFINET to exchange data with the host controller easily. This simple network solution saves cost and time for connection and installation of factory automation. Moreover, its components are compatible with suppliers’.
  • Page 275 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-16-3 Specifications Network interface Item Specifications Interface RJ45 Number of ports 2 ports Transmission cable IEEE 802.3 Transmission rate Category 5e shielding 100 M Communication 10/100 Mbps auto-negotiate protocol Interface PROFINET Electrical specification Item Specifications Power supply voltage Power consumption 0.8 W Insulation voltage...
  • Page 276 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-16-5 To set the communication parameters when C2000 connects with PROFINET When you operate VFD-C2000 through CMC-PN01, you should set the communication card as the source of VFD-C2000 controls and settings. You need to use the keypad to configure the following parameter addresses to the corresponding values: Parameters Setting value...
  • Page 277 Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-16-7 Network connection The wiring of CMC-PN01 shows as follows: When the installation is finished, supply electricity to the drive. The Pr.09-60 of the drive should be able to display “PROFINET” with a current value of 12. If not, make sure your version of the drive is correct (C2000 needs 2.04 or later versions) and the communication card is correctly connected.

  • Page 278: Emc-Cop01 -- Communication Card, Canopen

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-17 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen 8-17-6 Terminating Resistor Position 8-17-7 RJ-45 Pin Definition Pin name Definition CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high) CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low) CAN_GND Ground/0V/V- CAN_GND Ground/0V/V- RS485 socket 8-17-8 Specifications Interface RJ-45 Number of ports...

  • Page 279: Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables

    Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000 8-18 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables Delta Cables Part Number Description Length UC-CMC003-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 0.3m UC-CMC005-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 0.5m UC-CMC010-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector UC-CMC015-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 1.5m UC-CMC020-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector...

  • Page 280: Chapter 9 Specification

    Chapter 9 Specification C2000 Chapter 9 Specification 230V Series 9-2 460V Series 9-3 575V Series 9-4 690V Series 9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation 9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level 9-7 Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature 9-8 Efficiency Curve...

  • Page 281: V Series

    Chapter 9 Specification C2000 9-1 230V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ 550 750 Rated Output Capacity [kVA] Rated Output Current [A] 215 255 Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.75 18.5 Applicable Motor Output [HP] 120% of rated output current: 1 minute for every 5 minutes; Overload Capacity 160% of rated output current: 3 seconds for every 30 seconds Max.
  • Page 282 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 9-2 460V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _ C_ _ Rated Output Capacity [kVA] Rated Output Current [A] 10.5 Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.75 18.5 Applicable Motor Output [HP] 120% of rated output current: 1 minute for every 5 minutes; Overload Capacity 160% of rated output current: 3 seconds for every 30 seconds Max.
  • Page 283 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _ C_ _ 1100 1320 1600 1850 2200 2800 3150 3550 4500 Rated Output Capacity [kVA] Rated Output Current [A] Applicable Motor Output [kW] Applicable Motor Output [HP] 120% of rated output current: 1 minute for every 5 minutes; Overload Capacity 160% of rated output current: 3 seconds for every 30 seconds Max.
  • Page 284 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 9-3 575V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _ C53A-21 Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 12.1 18.6 24.1 Rated Output Current [A] 12.1 18.7 24.2 Applicable Motor Output [kW] Applicable Motor Output [HP] Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 15.4 19.9 Rated Output Current [A]...
  • Page 285 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 9-4 690V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _ C63B-00 / -21 1100 1320 Rated Output Capacity [kVA] Applicable Motor Output [690V, kW] 18.5 Applicable Motor Output [690V, HP] Applicable Motor Output [575V, HP] Rated Output Current [A] Rated Output Capacity [kVA] Applicable Motor Output [690V, kW] 18.5...
  • Page 286 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _ C63B-00/21 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 4500 5600 6300 Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 494.5 534.7 678.5 Applicable Motor Output [690V, kW] Applicable Motor Output [690V, HP] Applicable Motor Output [575V, HP] Rated Output Current [A] Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 402.5...
  • Page 287 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 General Specifications 230V/ 460V model: 1: V/F, 2: SVC, 3: VF+PG, 4: FOC+PG, 5: TQC+PG, 6: PM+PG, 7: FOC sensorless, Control Method 8: TQC sensorless, 9: PM sensorless 575V/ 690V model: 1: V/F, 2: V/F+PG, 3: SVC IM: Reach up to 150% of 1/50 rated speed Starting Torque PM: Reach up to 150% of 1/100 rated speed...
  • Page 288 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 Stall Prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently Restart after Instantaneous Parameter setting up to 20 seconds Power Failure Grounding Leakage Leakage current is higher than 50% of rated current of the AC motor drive Current Protection Short-circuit Current Rating Per UL 508C, the drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100kA...
  • Page 289 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive / inflammable gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg / cm every year.
  • Page 290 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level Operation Model Frame Top cover Conduit Box Protection Level Temperature Top cover IP20 / UL Open Type -10~50°C Frame A~C Standard removed 230V: 0.75~22kW conduit Standard with plate 460V: 0.75~30kW IP20 / UL Type1 / NEMA1 -10~40°C...
  • Page 291 High Altitude lower 0.5°C of temperature for every 100m increase in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner Grounded is 2000m. Contact Delta for more information, if you need to use this motor drive at an altitude of 2000m or higher. Table 9-10...
  • Page 292 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 control Advanced ambient temperature derating curve 230V / 460V Figure 9-3 575V / 690V Ambient temperature derating curve Figure 9-4 9-13...
  • Page 293 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 Current derating at high altitude Table 9-10 Figure 9-5 Carrier wave derating curve 230V / 460V General Control Derating Curve (Pr.00-10=1 and Pr.00-11=0~3) In Normal Duty mode (Pr.00-16=0) Setting 1 Setting 1 Setting 0 or 2 (50℃: UL open-type) Setting 0 or 2 (50℃: UL open-type) Setting 0 or 2 (40℃:UL type1 or open type_side by Setting 0 or 2 (40℃:UL type1 or open type_ side by...
  • Page 294 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 Advanced Control Derating Curve (Pr.00-10=1, and Pr.00-11=4~7; or Pr.00-10=3, and Pr.00-13=1~3) In Normal Duty mode (Pr.00-16=0) (50℃: UL open-type, Frame A~B) (50℃: UL open-type, Frame A~B) (40℃: UL type1 or open type_side by side, Frame A~B) (40℃: UL type1 or open type_ side by side, Frame A~B) (40℃: UL open-type, UL type 1 or open type_side by side, (40℃: UL open-type, UL type 1 or open type_side by side,...
  • Page 295 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 690V Derating Curve Figure 9-7 9-16...

  • Page 296: Efficiency Curve

    Chapter 9 Specification C2000 9-8 Efficiency Curve Figure 9-8 Figure 9-9 9-17...
  • Page 297 Chapter 9 Specification C2000 Figure 9-10 Figure 9-11 9-18...

  • Page 298: Chapter 10 Digital Keypad

    Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Chapter 10 Digital Keypad 10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad 10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction 10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 10-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor on KPC-CC01 Keypad 10-1...

  • Page 299: Descriptions Of Digital Keypad

    2. Buy a MKC-KPPK model to do wall mounting or embedded mounting. Its protection level is IP66. 3. The maximum RJ45 extension lead is 5 m (16ft) 4. This keypad can only be used on Delta’s motor drive C2000, CH2000 and CP2000. Descriptions of Keypad Functions...
  • Page 300 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Descriptions Direction: Left / Right / Up / Down In the numeric value setting mode, it is used to move the cursor and change the numeric value. In the menu/text selection mode, it is used for item selection. Function Key The functions keys have factory settings and can be defined by users.
  • Page 301 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Descriptions RUN LED: Condition/ State status CANopen at initial No LED CANopen at pre-operation Blinking CANopen~ “RUN” CANopen at stopped Single 1000 flash CANopen at operation status ERR LED: Condition/ State status No Error One message fail Single 1 000 flash...

  • Page 302: Function Of Digital Keypad Kpc-Cc01

    Startup page can only display pictures, no flash. When Power ON, it will display startup page then the main page. The main page displays Delta’s default setting F/H/A/U, the display order can be set by Pr.00.03 (Startup display). When the selected item is U page, use left key and right key to switch between the items, the display order of U page is set by Pr.00.04 (User display).
  • Page 303 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Parameter Setup For example: Setup source of master frequency command. Once in the Group 00 Motor Drive Parameter, Use Up/Down key to select parameter 20: Auto Frequency Command. When this parameter is selected, press ENTER key to go to this parameter’s setting menu.
  • Page 304 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 21. Output Frequency Lower Limit (Pr. 01-11) 22. Accel. Time 1 (Pr. 01-12) 23. Decel Time 1 (Pr. 01-13) 24. Over-voltage Stall Prevention (Pr. 06-01) 25. Derating protection (Pr. 06-55) 26. Software Brake Level (Pr. 07-00) 27.
  • Page 305 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 SVC Mode Items 1. Parameter Protection Password Input (Pr. 00-07) 2. Parameter Protection Password Setting (Pr. 00-08) 3. Control Mode (Pr. 00-10) 4. Control of Speed Mode (Pr. 00-11) 01: Password Decoder 5. Load Selection (Pr. 00-16) 6.
  • Page 306 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 01: Password Decoder 5. Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (Pr. 00-20) 6. Source of the Operation Command (AUTO) (Pr. 00-21) 7. Stop Method (Pr. 00-22) 8. Max. Operation Frequency (Pr. 01-00) 9. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (Pr. 01-01) 10.
  • Page 307 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 13. Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (Pr. 05-04) 14. No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (Pr. 05-05) 15. Over-voltage Stall Prevention (Pr. 06-01) 16. Software Brake Level (Pr. 07-00) 17. Encoder Type Selection (Pr. 10-00) 18.
  • Page 308 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 bottom left-hand corner of the screen. Press F4 on the keypad to delete this parameter from My Mode. 00- 10 Speed M ode 4. After pressing ENTER to delete <01 Control Mode>, the <02 Maximum Operating Frequency > will automatically replace <01 Control Mode>.
  • Page 309 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Choose 0: Normal load or 1: Heavy load based on the needs, then press ENTER. Changed List This function displays the parameter that user has set. For example: Set Pr. 13-00 Application Selection = 3: Fan Enter the changed list screen.
  • Page 310 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 1. Select 1: Save in the motor drive. 2. Press ENTER key to go to “Save in the motor drive” screen. Begin to copy parameters until it is done. Once copying parameters is done, keypad will automatically go back to this screen. Example: Saved in the keypad.
  • Page 311 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Press Up/ Down key to select an error record. Press to select. After selecting an error code, press ENTER to see that error record’s detail KPC-CE01 does not support this function. Press Up/ Down key to see an error record’s detail such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage, DCBUS voltage.
  • Page 312 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Use Up / Down key to set up Hour Use Up / Down key to set up Minute Use Up / Down key to set up Second After setting up, press ENTER to confirm the setup. NOTE Limitation: The charging process of the super capacitor will finish in about 6 minutes.
  • Page 313 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 10. PLC Function When the PLC function is activated or stopped, the PLC status will be displayed on main page of Delta default setting. Option 2: Enable PLC function Press Up/Down key to select a PLC’s function.
  • Page 314 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Unplug and plug back the keypad while copying the PLC program will cause a CPLt warning. Example: Saved in the keypad. 1. Go to “Copy PLC”. 2. Select the parameter group which needs to be copied and press ENTER key. Press ENTER key to go to “Save in the motor drive”...
  • Page 315 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 After selecting a setting value. Press Press to setting menu. ENTER to see screen’s display after contrast is adjusted to be +10. When the setting value is 0 Min, the backlight will be steady on. Then press ENTER. After select a setting value Press ENTER to see screen’s display result after contrast is adjusted to be -10.
  • Page 316 If editor accessory is not installed, “user defined” option will display a blank page. USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530 Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more detail. TPEditor Go to Delta’s website to download TPEditor V1.60 or later versions. http://www.deltaww.com/services/DownloadCenter2.aspx?secID=8&pid=2&tid=0&CID=06&itemID=060302&typeID=1&dow nloadID=,&title=-- Select Product Series --&dataType=8;&check=1&hl=en-US 14. Main page 1. Default page 60.00Hz...
  • Page 317 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 15. PC Link TPEditor: This function allows users to connect the keypad to a computer then to download and edit user defined pages. Click ENTER to go to <Waiting to connect to PC> In TPEditor, choose <Communication>, then choose “Write to HMI” Choose <YES>...
  • Page 318 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 VFDSoft: this function allows user to link to the VFDSoft Operating software then to upload data. Copy parameter 1~4 in KPC-CC01 When the Operation System (OS) of your computer is NOTE Windows 10, right click on the icon of VFDSoft to enter <Property> (as shown in the red color square in the image below).
  • Page 319 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 In Parameter Manager, choose <Load parameter table from KPC-CC01> Choose the right communication port and click OK Start to upload parameters to VFDSoft Uploading parameter is completed Before using the user defined starting screen and user defined main screen, the starting screen setup and the main screen setup have to be preset as user defined.
  • Page 320 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 16. Start Wizard ：Next； ：Back NOTE: The Start Wizard will not show up when re-power next time. MENU 10-23...
  • Page 321 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 MENU Use Up/Down key After selecting, to select “16: Start press ENTER Wizard” NOTE: The “16: Start Wizard” on the menu is to set whether shows start wizard when start up the drive. 10-24...
  • Page 322 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Other display When a fault occurs, the menu will display: Fault Warning CE01 Oc at accel Comm. Error 1 1. Press STOP / RESET button to reset the fault code. If still no response, please contact local distributor or return to the factory.

  • Page 323: Tpeditor Installation Instruction

    2. Go to File (F) Click on New. The Window below will pop up. At the device type, click on the drop down menu and choose DELTA VFD-C Inverter. At the TP type, click on the drop down menu and choose VFD-C KeyPad.
  • Page 324 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 5. Static Text . Open a blank page, click once on this button , and then double click on that blank page. The following window will pop up. 6. Static Bitmap Open a blank page, then click once on this button and then double click on that blank page.
  • Page 325 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 9. Downloading setting: Go to Tool > Communication. Set up communication port and speed of IFD6530. 10. Only three speed selections are available: 9600 bps, 19200 bps and 38400 bps. 11. When a dialogue box displayed on the screen asking to confirm writing or not, press buttons on the keypad to go to MENU, select PC LINK and then press ENTER and wait for few seconds.
  • Page 326 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Edit Main Page & Example of Download Go to editing page, select Edit > Add one page or press the button ADD on the right hand side of the HMI page to increase number of pages to edit. This keypad currently supports up to 256 pages. On the bottom right-hand corner of the HMI, click on a page number to edit or go to VIEW >...
  • Page 327 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Scale Setting : On the Tool Bar, click on for Scale Setting. You can also edit Scale Setting in the Property Window on the right hand side of your computer screen. Scale Position: Click on the drop down list to choose which position that you need to place a scale. Scale Side: Click on the drop down list to choose if you want to number your scale from smaller number to bigger number or from big to small.
  • Page 328 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Button : Currently this function only allows the Keypad to switch pages, other functions are not yet available. Text input function and Image inserted functions are not yet supported. Double click on to open set up window. <Button Type>...
  • Page 329 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Clock Display Setting : The setup window of the Clock Display is shown as the image below. Time, Day or Date can be displayed on the keypad. Open a new file and click once in that window, you will see the following In the clock display setting, you can choose to display Time, Day or Date on the Keypad.
  • Page 330 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 10. Numeric Input Setting This menu allows you to provide parameters or communication ports and to input numbers. Click once on this button Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following: Related Device: There are two blank spaces to fill in, one is <Write>...
  • Page 331 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 10-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions Fault Codes LCM Display * Description Corrective Actions An error has occurred on keypad’s flash memory. 1. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors. Fault 2. Verify if there’s any problem on Flash IC. FrEr Keypad flash memory read error 3.
  • Page 332 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Warning Codes LCM Display * Description Corrective Actions Motor drive doesn’t accept the communication command sent from keypad. 1. Verify if the keypad is properly connected to the Warning motor drive on the communication contact by a Modbus function code error CE01 communication cable such as RJ-45.
  • Page 333 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 File Copy Setting Fault Description: These faults will happen when KPC-CC01 cannot perform the command after clicking the Enter button in copy function. LCM Display * Description Corrective Actions The property of the parameter / file is read-only and cannot be written to.
  • Page 334 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 LCM Display * Description Corrective Actions A setting cannot be made, because some data are locked. 1. Verify if the data are unlocked or able to be unlocked. If the data are unlocked, try to make the File is locked with password setting again.
  • Page 335 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 10-5 Functions not supported when using TPEditor with KPC-CC01 1. Local Page Setting and Global Setting functions are not supported. 2. [Communication][Read from TP] functions are not supported. 3. In RTC Display Setting, the Refer Device cannot be modified. 10-38...

  • Page 336: Chapter 11 Summary Of Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings This chapter provides a summary of parameter (Pr.) setting ranges and defaults. You can set, change, and reset parameters through the digital keypad. NOTE 1) : You can set this parameter during operation 2) For more details on parameters, please refer to Ch12 Description of Parameter Settings.
  • Page 337 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 34: 230V, 90.0kW 35: 460V, 90.0kW 37: 460V, 110.0kW 39: 460V, 132.0kW 41: 460V, 160.0kW 43: 460V, 185.0kW 45: 460V, 220.0kW 47: 460V, 280.0kW 49: 460V, 315.0kW 51: 460V, 355.0kW 55: 460V, 450.0kW 93: 460V, 4kW 505: 575V, 1.5kW...
  • Page 338 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index) 7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave) 9: Reset all parameters to defaults with base frequency at 50 Hz 10: Reset all parameters to defaults with base frequency at 60 Hz 0: F (frequency command) 1: H (output frequency)
  • Page 339 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 24: Position command tracing error (E.) 25: Overload count (0.00~100.00%) (o.) (Unit: %) 26: Ground fault GFF (G.) (Unit: %) 27: DC BUS voltage ripple (r.) (Unit: V 28: Display PLC data D1043 (C) 29: Display PM pole section (EMC-PG01U application) (4.) 30: Display output of user defined (U)
  • Page 340 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0–65535 Parameter protection password 0: No password protection / password entered 00-08  setting correctly (Pr. 00-07) 1: Parameter set 0: Speed mode 1: Point-to-point position control mode 00-10 Control mode ...
  • Page 341 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default bit0: Control command by PLC force control bit1: Frequency command by PLC force control Read 00-19 PLC command mask bit2: Position command by PLC force control only bit3: Torque command by PLC force control 0: Digital keypad 1: RS-485 communication 2: External analog input (Pr.
  • Page 342 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 005xh: kW 006xh: HP 007xh: ppm 008xh: 1/m 009xh: kg/s 00Axh: kg/m 00Bxh: kg/h 00Cxh: lb/s 00Dxh: lb/m 00Exh: lb/h 00Fxh: ft/s 010xh: ft/m 011xh: m 012xh: ft 013xh: degC 014xh: degF 015xh: mbar 016xh: bar...
  • Page 343 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Read 00-27 User-defined value Read only Only 0: Standard HOA function 1: When switching between local and remote, the drive stops. 2: When switching between local and remote, the drive runs with REMOTE settings for frequency and operation status.
  • Page 344 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as check point. 1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse limit (CCWL) as check point. 2: Forward run to home. Set ORG: OFF →...

  • Page 345: Basic Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 01 Basic Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 60.00 / 01-00 Maximum operation frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz  50.00 60.00 / 01-01 Output frequency of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz 50.00 230V: 0.0–255.0 V 200.0 460V: 0.0–510.0 V 400.0 01-02 Output voltage of motor 1...
  • Page 346 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec. The default of motor drive with 30HP and above: 60.00 / 60.0 Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec. Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec. 01-16 Acceleration time 3 10.00 ...
  • Page 347 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 01-31 Skip frequency 2 (lower limit) 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00 01-32 Skip frequency 3 (upper limit) 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00 01-33 Skip frequency 3 (lower limit) 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00 0: Waiting for output 01-34 Zero-speed mode 1: Zero-speed operation...
  • Page 348 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 13: 90Hz, voltage saturation in 60Hz 14: 120Hz, voltage saturation in 60Hz 15: 180Hz, voltage saturation in 60Hz 0: Linear acceleration and linear deceleration 1: Auto-acceleration and linear deceleration Auto-acceleration and 2: Linear acceleration and auto-deceleration 01-44...

  • Page 349: Digital Input / Output Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 02 Digital Input / Output Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Two-wire mode 1, power on for operation control Two-wire / Three-wire operation 1: Two -wire mode 2, power on for operation 02-00 control control 2: Three-wire, power on for operation control...
  • Page 350 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 26: TQC / FOC mode selection 27: ASR1 / ASR2 selection 28: Emergency stop (EF1) 29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection 30: Signal confirmation for -connection 31: High torque bias (Pr. 11-30) 32: Middle torque bias (Pr.
  • Page 351 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 02-13 Multi-function output 1 RLY1 0: No function  02-14 Multi-function output 2 RLY2 1: Indication during RUN  02-16 Multi-function output 3 (MO1) 2: Operation speed reached  02-17 Multi-function output 4 (MO2) 3: Desired frequency reached 1 (Pr.
  • Page 352 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 36: Error output selection 2 (Pr. 06-24) 37: Error output selection 3 (Pr. 06-25) 38: Error output selection 4 (Pr. 06-26) 39: Position reached (Pr. 10-19) 40: Speed reached (including stop) 41: Multi-position reached 42: Crane function 43: Actual motor speed higher than Pr.
  • Page 353 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Output frequency setting for 0.00–599.00Hz 02-34 3.00  multi-function output terminal (Motor speed when using PG Card) 0: Disable External operation control selection 02-35 1: Drive runs if the RUN command remains after ...
  • Page 354 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Internal multi-function output terminal 02-75 0000–FFFFh 0000h selection 11-19...

  • Page 355: Analog Input / Output Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 03 Analog Input / Output Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 0: No function  03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque  03-02 Analog input selection (AUI) control mode) ...
  • Page 356 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI) 03-18 Analog input addition function  1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Continue operation at the last frequency Signal loss selection for 03-19 2: Decelerate to 0Hz analog input 4–20mA 3: Stop immediately and display ACE 03-20...
  • Page 357 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: 4–20mA 03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1: 0–10V  2: 0–20mA PLC analog output terminal Read 03-30 Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals status only 0: 0–20mA output 03-31 AFM2 output selection ...
  • Page 358 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Pr. 03-29=0, 0.00–20.00mA 12.00 03-59 ACI mid-point Pr. 03-29=1, 0.00–10.00V 5.00  Pr. 03-29=2, 0.00–20.00mA 10.00 03-60 ACI proportional mid-point -100.00–100.00% 50.00  Pr. 03-29=0, 0.00–20.00mA 20.00 03-61 ACI highest point Pr.

  • Page 359: Multi-Stage Speed Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 04-00 step speed frequency 0.00 0.00–599.00Hz  04-01 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00  04-02 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00  04-03 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00 ...
  • Page 360 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 04-37 Position command 12 (rotation) -30000–30000  04-38 Position command 12 (pulse) -32767–32767  04-39 Position command 13 (rotation) -30000–30000  04-40 Position command 13 (pulse) -32767–32767  04-41 Position command 14 (rotation) -30000–30000 ...
  • Page 361 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 04-81 PLC Application parameter 11 0–65535  04-82 PLC Application parameter 12 0–65535  04-83 PLC Application parameter 13 0–65535  04-84 PLC Application parameter 14 0–65535  04-85 PLC Application parameter 15 0–65535 ...

  • Page 362: Motor Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 05 Motor Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Simple rolling auto-tuning for induction motor (IM) 2: Static auto-tuning for induction motor (IM) 4: Dynamic test for PM magnetic pole 05-00 Motor parameter auto tuning (with the running in forward direction) 5: Rolling auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM)
  • Page 363 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Depending Stator resistance (Rs) for on the 05-18 0.000–65.535 model induction motor 2 power Rotor resistance (Rr) of induction 05-19 0.000–65.535 0.000 motor 2 Magnetizing inductance (Lm) of 05-20 0.0–6553.5mH induction motor 2 Stator inductance (Lx) of...
  • Page 364 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Depending System inertia for a permanent on the 05-38 0.0–6553.5kg.cm motor magnet motor power Stator resistance for a permanent 05-39 0.000–65.535 0.000 magnet motor 05-40 Permanent magnet motor Ld 0.00–655.35mH 0.00 05-41...

  • Page 365: Protection Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 06 Protection Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 230V: Frame A–D: 150.0–220.0V 180.0 Frame E and above: 190.0–220.0V 200.0 460V: 06-00 Low voltage level  Frame A–D: 300.0–440.0V 360.0 Frame E and above: 380.0~440.0V 400.0 575V: 420.0–520.0V 470.0...
  • Page 366 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: By current acceleration / deceleration time 1: By the 1 acceleration / deceleration time Acceleration / deceleration time 2: By the 2 acceleration / deceleration time 06-05 selection for stall prevention at ...
  • Page 367 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Fault record 1 0: No fault record 06-17 (Present fault record) 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 06-18 Fault record 2 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 06-19 Fault record 3 3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn) 06-20 Fault record 4...
  • Page 368 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 42: PG feedback error (PGF1) 43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) 44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) 45: PG slip error (PGF4) 48: Analog current input loss (ACE) 49: External fault input (EF) 50: Emergency stop (EF1) 51: External base block (bb) 52: Password error (Pcod)
  • Page 369 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE) 105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE) 106: CANopen slave station number setting error (CAdE) 107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE) 111: ictE Internal communication overtime error (InrCOM) 112: PM sensorless shaft lock error 142: Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current error)
  • Page 370 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Read 06-36 IGBT temperature at malfunction -3276.7–3276.7°C only Capacitance temperature at Read 06-37 -3276.7–3276.7°C malfunction only Read 06-38 Motor speed at malfunction -32767–32767rpm only Read 06-39 Torque command at malfunction -32767–32767% only Status of the multi-function input...
  • Page 371 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 1: Constant carrier frequency and limit load current by setting carrier wave 2: Constant rated current (same as setting 0), but close current limit 06-56 PT100 voltage level 1 0.000–10.000V 5.000 ...

  • Page 372: Special Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 07 Special Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 230V: 350.0–450.0V 370.0 460V: 700.0–900.0V 740.0 07-00 Built-in software brake level  575V: 850.0–1116.0V 895.0 690V: 939.0–1318.0V 1057.0 07-01 DC brake current level 0–100%  07-02 DC brake time at run 0.0–60.0 sec.
  • Page 373 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Fan always ON 1: Fan is OFF after AC motor drive stops for one minute 2: Fan is ON when AC motor drive runs; fan is OFF when AC motor drive stops. 07-19 Fan cooling control ...
  • Page 374 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default PMSVC voltage feedback 07-38 0.50–2.00 1.00 forward gain 07-62 dEb gain (Kp) 0–65535 8000 07-63 dEb gain (Ki) 0–65535 11-39...

  • Page 375: High-Function Pid Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 08 High-function PID Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00–03-02) 2: Negative PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, without direction (Pr. 10-02) 3: Negative PID feedback:by PG card pulse input, with direction (Pr.
  • Page 376 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Refer to PID output command 08-18 Sleep mode function setting 1: Refer to PID feedback signal 08-19 Wake-up integral limit 0.0–200.0% 50.0  0: Serial connection 08-20 PID mode selection 1: Parallel connection Enable PID to change the 0: Operation direction cannot be changed...

  • Page 377: Communication Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 09 Communication Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 09-00 Communication address 1–254  09-01 COM1 transmission speed 4.8–115.2Kbps  0: Warn and continue operation 1: Warn and ramp to stop 09-02 COM1 transmission fault treatment ...
  • Page 378 1–127 0: 1Mbps 1: 500Kbps 2: 250Kbps 09-37 CANopen speed 3: 125Kbps 4: 100Kbps (Delta only) 5: 50Kbps bit0: CANopen Guarding Time out bit1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out bit2: CANopen SYNC Time out 09-39 CANopen warning record bit3: CANopen SDO Time out...
  • Page 379 The setting values of CANopen indexes are fail bit9: The setting value of CANopen address is fail bit10: The checksum value of CANopen indexes is fail 0: Disable (Delta-defined decoding method) 09-40 CANopen decoding method 1: Enable (CANopen DS402 standard protocol) 0: Node Reset...
  • Page 380 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Standard DeviceNet: 0: 125Kbps 1: 250Kbps 2: 500Kbps 3: 1Mbps (Delta only) Non-standard DeviceNet: (Delta only) 0: 10Kbps Communication card speed setting 09-71 1: 20Kbps  (for DeviceNet) 2: 50Kbps...
  • Page 381 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Communication card gateway address 1 09-84 0–65535  (for MODBUS TCP) Communication card gateway address 2 09-85 0–65535  for MODBUS TCP) Communication card gateway address 3 09-86 0–65535 ...

  • Page 382: Feedback Control Parameters

    IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor NOTE Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Disable 1: ABZ 2: ABZ (Delta encoder for Delta servo motor) 10-00 Encoder type selection 3: Resolver 4: ABZ / UVW 5: MI8 single phase pulse input 10-01 Encoder pulses per revolution 1–20000...
  • Page 383 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Detection time of encoder /  10-14 0.0–10.0 sec. speed observer slip 0: Warn and continue operation Encoder / speed observer stall  10-15 1: Warn and ramp to stop and slip error action 2: Warn and coast to stop 0: Disable...
  • Page 384 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 10-30 Resolver pole pair 1–50 pole pairs  10-31 I/F mode, current command 0–150% of motor rated current PM FOC sensorless speed  10-32 0.00–600.00Hz 5.00 estimator bandwidth PM sensorless speed estimator ...

  • Page 385: Advanced Parameters

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 11 Advanced Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default bit0: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR bit1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode) bit2: Zero servo 11-00 System control bit6: 0Hz linear-cross 0000h bit7: Save or do not save the frequency bit8: Maximum speed for point to point position control 11-01...
  • Page 386 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Gain value for the APR feed 11-25 0–100  forward 11-26 APR curve time 0.00–655.35 sec. 3.00  11-27 Maximum torque command 0–500%  0: Disable 1: Analog signal input (Pr. 03-00) 11-28 Torque offset source ...
  • Page 387 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Point-to-point position control 11-45 0.00–655.35 sec. 3.00  deceleration time 11-46 0.000–65.535 sec. 0.050 Torque output filter time 11-52...

  • Page 388: Application Parameters By Industry

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 13 Application Parameters by Industry Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Disable 1: User-defined Parameter 2: Compressor (IM) 13-00 Industry Parameters combination 3: Fan 4: Pump 10: Air Handling Unit, AHU 11-53...

  • Page 389: Extension Card Parameter

    Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 14 Extension Card Parameter Parameter Name Setting Range Default Extension card Input terminal 0: Disable 14-00  selection (AI10) 1: Frequency command Extension card Input terminal 2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode) 14-01 ...
  • Page 390 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 22: Communication card analog output 23: Constant voltage output 25: CANopen and RS-485 analog output Analog output 1 gain output 14-14 0.0–500.0% 100.0  (AO10) Analog output 1 gain output 14-15 0.0–500.0% 100.0...
  • Page 391 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 [The page intentionally left blank] 11-56...

  • Page 392: Chapter 12 Description Of Parameter Settings

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings 12-1 Description of Parameter Settings 00 Drive Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Default: #.# Settings Read Only Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current Default: #.# Settings Read Only...
  • Page 393 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 575V Series Frame Identity code Rated current for 16.8 heavy load (A) Rated current for 15.5 normal load (A) 690V Series Frame 18.5 Identity code Rated current for heavy load (A) Rated current for normal load (A) Frame 400 450 560 630...
  • Page 394 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Start-up Display Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: F (Frequency command) 1: H (Output frequency) 2: U (User defined) 3: A (Output current)  This parameter determines the start-up display page. This is the user defined choice display according to the setting in Pr.00-04.
  • Page 395 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 29: Display PM pole section (EMC-PG01U application) (4.) 30 : Display output of user defined (U) 31 : Display Pr. 00-05 user Gain (K) 32: Number of actual motor revolution during operation (PG card plug in and Z phase signal input) (Z.) 33: Motor actual position during operation (when PG card is connected)(q) 34: Operation speed of fan (F.) (Unit: %)
  • Page 396 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  The setting value 16 is ON / OFF status of digital input according to Pr. 02-12 setting, and the setting value 19 is the corresponding CPU pin ON / OFF status of the digital input. ...
  • Page 397 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Protection Password Input  Default: 0 Settings 0–65535 Display 0–4 (the number of password attempts allowed)  This parameter allows you to enter your password (which is set in Pr. 00-08) to unlock the parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
  • Page 398 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Decode Flow Char t 00-08 Password Set 00-07 Password Input Shut down th drive Pr.00-08=0 and re-app ly power Re-apply power. (The password is still valid) Control Mode  Default: 0 Settings 0: Speed mode 1: Point-to-Point position control mode 2: Torque mode 3: Homing mode...
  • Page 399 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  There are more detailed explanation of motor adjustment procedure in section 12-2  When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is as follows.  When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is as follows. ...
  • Page 400 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PM Space Vector Control (PMSVC):  When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 3, the IM FOCPG control diagram is as follows:  When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 4, the PM FOCPG control diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-9...
  • Page 401 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 5, IMFOC Sensorless control diagram is as follows:  When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 6, PM FOC Sensorless control diagram is as follows: ...
  • Page 402 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Point-to-Point Position Control Default: 0 Settings: 0: Relative position 1: Absolute position  Pr. 00-12 = 0 is incremental type P2P; Pr. 00-12 = 1 is absolute type P2P Control of Torque Mode Default: 0 0: IM TQCPG (IM Torque control + Encoder) Settings 1: PM TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder)
  • Page 403 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Pr. 00-13=2, IM TQC Sensorless control diagram is as follows: Load Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: Normal load 1: Heavy load  Normal load: over-load ability is 160% rated output current in 3 seconds (120% rated output current in 1 minute).
  • Page 404 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 230V Series [Heavy Load] 1–15HP 2–15kHz 2kHz 4–15kHz 4kHz 4–10kHz 4kHz 4–14kHz 4kHz [0.75–11kW] 20–50HP 2–10kHz 2kHz 4–10kHz 4kHz 4–10kHz 4kHz 4–10kHz 4kHz [15–37kW] 60–125HP 2–9kHz 2kHz 4–9kHz 4kHz 4–9kHz 4kHz 4–9kHz 4kHz [45–90kW] 460V Series [Normal Load] VF, VFPG, SVC, PMFOCPG,...
  • Page 405 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PLC Command Mask Default: Read Only Settings bit0: Control command by PLC force control bit1: Frequency command by PLC force control bit2: Position command by PLC force control bit3: Torque command by PLC force control ...
  • Page 406 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives the STOP command. 1. Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates to 0 or the minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-07) according to the set deceleration time, and then to stop.
  • Page 407 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 bit 4–15: user-defined unit 000xh: Hz 001xh: rpm 002xh: % 003xh: kg 004xh: m/s 005xh: kW 006xh: HP 007xh: ppm 008xh: 1/m 009xh: kg/s 00Axh: kg/m 00Bxh: kg/h 00Cxh: lb/s 00Dxh: lb/m 00Exh: lb/h 00Fxh: ft/s 010xh: ft/m 011xh: m...
  • Page 408 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Maximum User-Defined Value Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 0–65535 (when Pr. 00-25 set to no decimal place) 0.0–6553.5 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 1 decimal place) 0.00–655.35 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 2 decimal places) 0.000–65.535 (when Pr.
  • Page 409 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 when KPC-CC01 is installed with firmware version higher than version 1.021). Set the LOCAL frequency and operation source with Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21. Set the REMOTE frequency and operation source with Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. Select or switch LOC / REM mode with the digital keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or set the multi-function input terminal MI = 56.
  • Page 410 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Digital Keypad STOP Function  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable STOP key 1: Enable STOP key  This parameter is valid when the digital keypad is not set as the operation source (Pr. 00-21≠0). When Pr.
  • Page 411 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 2. When Y=0, X=1 or Y=0, X=3 Speed Posi tion Z p ulse CWL/ORGP 3. When Y=1, X=2 Speed Posi tion Z p ulse ORGP 4. When Y=1, X=3 Speed Posi tion Z p ulse ORGP 5.
  • Page 412 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 6. When Y=2, X=3 Speed Position ORGP 7. When Y=2, X=4 Speed Position Z pulse 8. When Y=2, X=5 Speed Position Z pulse Homing by Frequency 1  Default: 8.00 Settings 0.00–599.00Hz Homing by Frequency 2 ...
  • Page 413 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Display Filter Time (Keypad)  Default: 0.100 Settings 0.001–65.535 sec.  Minimize the display value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad. Software Version (Date) Default: #### Settings Read only  Displays the current drive software version by date. 12.1-00-22...

  • Page 414: Basic Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 01 Basic Parameters  You can be set this parameter during operation. Maximum Operation Frequency Default: 60.00 / 50.00 Settings 00.00–599.00 Hz  Determines the AC motor drive’s maximum operation frequency range. This setting corresponds to the maximum value for the analog input frequency setting signal (0 –...
  • Page 415 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1  Default: 11.0 / 22.0 / 0.0 / 0.0 Settings 230V series: 0.0–240.0 V 460V series: 0.0–480.0 V 575V series: 0.0–637.0 V 690V series: 0.0–720.0 V Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 2 Default: 3.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz...
  • Page 416 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1  Default: 1.0 / 2.0 / 0.0 / 0.0 Settings 230V series: 0.0–240.0 V 460V series: 0.0–480.0 V 575V series: 0.0–637.0 V 690V series: 0.0–720.0 V Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2 Default: 0.50 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz...
  • Page 417 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Common settings for the V/F curve: (1) General purpose (2) For fan and hydraulic machinery (3) High starting torque Start-Up Frequency Default: 0.50 Settings 0.00–599.00Hz  When the starting frequency is higher than the minimum output frequency, the drives’ output is from the starting frequency to the setting frequency.
  • Page 418 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Output Frequency Upper Limit  Default: 599.00 Settings 0.00–599.00Hz Output Frequency Lower Limit  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–599.00Hz  Use the upper and lower limit output frequency settings to limit the actual output frequency. If the frequency setting is higher than the upper limit (Pr.
  • Page 419 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Related parameters: Pr.01-00 Maximum Operation Frequency, and Pr.01-11 Output Frequency Lower Limit  The lower output frequency limits the minimum output frequency of the drive. When the drive frequency command or feedback control frequency is lower than this setting, the lower limit of the frequency limits the drive output frequency.
  • Page 420 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 JOG Deceleration Time  Default: 10.00 The default of motor drive with 30HP and above: 60.00 / 60.0 Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 seconds Pr.01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 seconds  Use the acceleration time to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to accelerate from 0.00Hz to maximum output frequency (Pr.
  • Page 421 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 First / Fourth Acceleration / Deceleration Frequency  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  This function does not require the external terminal switching function; it switches the acceleration and deceleration time automatically by the Pr.01-23 setting. If you set the external terminal, it is based on the external terminal first, and not on Pr.01-23.
  • Page 422 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit) Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit) Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit) Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit) Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit) Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit) Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00~599.00Hz ...
  • Page 423 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  In V/F, VFPG, SVC and FOC Sensorless modes  In FOCPG mode, when Pr. 01-34 is set to 2, the AC motor drive operates according to the setting. V/F Curve Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: V/F curve determined by Pr.
  • Page 424 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Auto-acceleration and Auto-deceleration Setting  Default: 0 Settings 0: Linear acceleration and linear deceleration 1: Auto-acceleration and linear deceleration 2: Linear acceleration and auto-deceleration 3: Auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration 4: Stall prevention by auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration (limited by Pr. 01-12 to Pr.
  • Page 425 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Time Unit for Acceleration / Deceleration and S Curve Default: 0 Settings 0: Unit 0.01 sec. 1: Unit 0.1 sec. CANopen Quick Stop Time  Default: 1.00 Settings Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec. Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0–6000.0 sec. ...

  • Page 426: Digital Input / Output Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 02 Digital Input/Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation. Two-wire / Three-wire Operation Control Default: 0 Settings 0: Two-wire mode 1, power on for operation control 1: Two -wire mode 2, power on for operation control 2: Three-wire, power on for operation control ...
  • Page 427 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI13) Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI14) Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI15) Default: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Multi-step speed command 1/ multi-step position command 1 2: Multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position command 2 3: Multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position command 3 4: Multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position command 4...
  • Page 428 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 52: Selection for PLC mode bit1 53: Trigger CANopen quick stop 55: Brake release 56: Local / Remote Selection  This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.  The terminals of Pr. 02-26~Pr. 02-31 are set as the corresponded parameters of MI10~MI13 when using with optional card EMC-D42A.
  • Page 429 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions When you enable this function, the drive stops acceleration or deceleration immediately. After you disable this function, the AC motor drive starts to accelerate or decelerate from the inhibit point. Acceleration/deceleration Speed Inhibit The 1 acceleration /...
  • Page 430 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions ON: force the source of the frequency to be ACI. If the rotating Rotating speed speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AVI at the same time, command form ACI the priority is AVI >...
  • Page 431 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions ON: the output of the drive stops immediately, displays “EF1” on the keypad, and the motor is in free run status. The drive keeps running until the fault is cleared after you press RESET on the keypad (EF: External Fault).
  • Page 432 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions ON: the AC motor drive executes internal single-point position control according to the setting for Pr.10-19. This function is valid in FOCPG mode only. Enable single-point position control – ON/OFF: the drive uses the multi-function inputs 1 4 ON/OFF status to find the corresponding multi-step positions and writes the current motor position into the corresponding multi-step...
  • Page 433 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions When Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5, ON: the input pulse of the PG card is the position command. When using this function, set Pr.11-25 to 0. Example: refer to the following diagram when using this function with MIx=35 returning to homing position.
  • Page 434 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions Signal input for forward direction limit switch (PL). ON: the drive uses the settings in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42 to execute homing in Forward direction homing a forward direction (clockwise). (PL) Note: PL means input terminal detection is positive-edge triggered or is regarded as N.C.
  • Page 435 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When Pr.11-00 bit 7=1, the frequency is not saved. The Frequency command returns to zero when the drive stops, and the displayed frequency is 0.00 Hz. At this time, the increasing or decreasing frequency command (F) by using the UP or DOWN key is valid only when the drive is running.
  • Page 436 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  The default for bit 0 (MI1) is FWD terminal, and the default for bit 1 (MI2) is REV terminal. You cannot use this parameter to change the input mode when Pr.02-00 ≠ 0. ...
  • Page 437 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 10: Low voltage warning (Lv) (Pr. 06-00) 11: Malfunction indication 12: Mechanical brake release (Pr. 02-32) 13: Over-heat warning (Pr. 06-15) 14: Software brake signal indication (Pr. 07-00) 15: PID feedback error (Pr.08-13, 08-14) 16: Slip error (oSL) 17: Count value reached, does not return to 0 (Pr.
  • Page 438 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 65: Output for CANopen and RS-485 66: SO output logic A 67: Analog input signal level reached 68: SO output logic B 70: FAN warning detection output  Use this parameter to set the function of the multi-function terminals. ...
  • Page 439 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions Count value reached, When the drive executes the external counter, this contact is returns to 0 (Pr. 02-19) active if the count value is equal to the setting value for Pr.02-19. External interrupt B.B.
  • Page 440 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The current position action status of these three terminals will be outputted. Example: if setting Pr. 02-36~02-38 to 41 and only the multi-position of the second point has been done.
  • Page 441 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions When dEb rises at the master, MO sends a dEb signal to the slave. Output the message when the master triggers dEb. This Master dEb output ensures that the slave also triggers dEb. Then slave follows the deceleration time of the master to stop simultaneously with the master.
  • Page 442 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions For RS-485 interface (InnerCOM/ MODBUS) output. Setting of Physical Corresponding related Attribute terminal Index parameters Pr. 02-13 = 51 bit0 at 2640H Pr. 02-14 = 51 bit1 at 2640H Analog output control for Pr.
  • Page 443 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Settings Functions Descriptions Pr.03-45: The high level for the analog input, default is 50%. Pr.03-46: The low level for the analog input, default is 10%. If analog input > Pr.03-45, the multi-function output terminal operates.
  • Page 444 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Terminal Pr. Setting Indexes of MODBUS direct control Pr. 02-13 = 51 The bit0 of 2640h Pr. 02-14 = 51 The bit1 of 2640h Pr. 02-16 = 51 The bit3 of 2640h Pr. 02-17 = 51 The bit4 of 2640h MO10 Pr.
  • Page 445 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Preliminary Counting Value Reached (does not return to 0)  Default Setting: 0 Settings 0~65500  When the counter value counts from 1 and reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-36, Pr. 02-37 set to 17 (Preliminary Count Value Setting).
  • Page 446 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Fcmd=60Hz 42Hz 02-24=40Hz 40Hz 38Hz 02-25=2Hz 12Hz 02-22=10Hz 10Hz 02-23=2Hz 02-13,02-14, 02-36,02-37, 02-13,02-14, 02-36,02-37, =4 Brake Delay Time Default: 0.000 Settings 0.000~65.000 sec.  When the AC motor drive runs after Pr. 02-32 delay time, the corresponding multi-function output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON.
  • Page 447 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  If this parameter is used without DC brake, it will be invalid. Refer to the following operation timing. Output Current Level Setting for Multi-function Output Terminals  Default: 0 Settings 0~100%  When output current is higher or equal to Pr. 02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal (Pr.
  • Page 448 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Motor Zero-speed Level  Default: 0 Settings 0~65535 rpm  This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals (set to 43). It needs to be used with PG card and motor with encoder feedback. ...
  • Page 449 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal Default: Read only  For Example: When Pr.02-50 displays 0034h (hex) (that is, the value is 52 (decimal) and 110100 (binary)), it means that MI1, MI3 and MI4 are ON. 12.1-02-24...
  • Page 450 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Display the status of multi-function output terminal Default: Read only  For Example: When Pr.02-51 displays 000 Bh (hex) (that is, the value is 11 (decimal) and 1011 (binary)), it means that RY1, RY2, and MO1 are ON. Display the External Output Terminals Used by PLC Default: Read only ...
  • Page 451 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  For Example: When Pr.02-52 displays 0034h (hex) (that is, the value is 52 (decimal) and 110100 (binary)), it means that MI1, MI3 and MI4 are used by PLC. Display the External Multi-function Output Terminals Used by PLC Default: Read only ...
  • Page 452 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Display the Frequency Command Executed by External Terminal Default: Read only Settings 0.00~599.00Hz (Read only)  When you set the source of the Frequency command as the external terminal, if Lv or Fault occurs, the external terminal Frequency command is saved in this parameter. Release Brake Check Default: 0.000 sec.
  • Page 453 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When Pr. 02-57 = 0, the output current is lower than the setting of Pr. 02-33 Pivot Point of the current (< Pr. 02-33) or when output frequency is lower than the setting of Pr. 02-58(< Pr. 02-58), disable the setting of #42 of the multi-function output Pr.
  • Page 454 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  For example: if setting MI1, MI3, MI4 to be internal terminals, the setting value should be bit5x2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2 = 1X2 +1X2 +1X2 = 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following. The 52 =32h, Pr.

  • Page 455: Analog Input / Output Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 03 Analog Input/Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation. Analog Input Selection (AVI)  Default: 1 Analog Input Selection (ACI)  Default: 0 Analog Input Selection (AUI)  Default: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque control mode) 2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
  • Page 456 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When the settings for Pr. 03-00–Pr. 03-02 are the same, the AVI input is selected first. Analog Input Bias (AVI)  Default: 0.0 Settings -100.0–100.0%  Sets the corresponding AVI voltage for the external analog input 0. Analog Input Bias (ACI) ...
  • Page 457 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 In the diagram below: Black line: Curve with no bias. Gray line: curve with bias 12.1-03-3...
  • Page 458 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-4...
  • Page 459 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-5...
  • Page 460 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-6...
  • Page 461 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-7...
  • Page 462 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-8...
  • Page 463 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-9...
  • Page 464 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-10...
  • Page 465 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-11...
  • Page 466 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-12...
  • Page 467 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-13...
  • Page 468 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-14...
  • Page 469 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-03-15...
  • Page 470 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Reverse Setting when Analog Signal Input is Negative Frequency  Default: 0 Settings 0: Negative frequency is not allowed. The digital keypad or external terminal controls the forward and reverse direction. 1: Negative frequency is allowed. Positive frequency = run in forward direction;...
  • Page 471 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  There is often noisy in the analog signal from AVI, ACI and AUI, which affects the stability of the control. Use these input delays to filter a noisy analog signal.  When the time constant setting is too large, the control is stable but the control response is slow. When the time constant setting is too small, the control response is faster but the control may be unstable.
  • Page 472 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1)  Default: 0 Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2)  Default: 0 Settings – Function Chart Settings Functions Descriptions Output frequency (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100%. Frequency command (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.
  • Page 473 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Analog Output 1 in REV Direction (AFM1)  Default: 0 Analog Output 2 in REV Direction (AFM2)  Default: 0 Settings 0: Absolute value of output voltage 1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V 2: Reverse output 5–0 V;...
  • Page 474 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PLC Analog Output Terminal Status Default: Read only Settings Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals  Pr. 03-30 displays the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.  For Example: When Pr. 03-30 displays 0002h (hex), it means that AFM2 is used by PLC. AFM2 Output Selection ...
  • Page 475 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 AI Lower Level  Default: 10.00 Settings -100.00–100.00 %  Multi-function output terminal 67 must work with Pr.03-44 to select input channels. When analog input level is higher than Pr.03-45, multi-function output acts; when analog input level is lower than Pr.03-46, multi-function output terminals stop outputting.
  • Page 476 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 AVI Proportional Lowest Point  Default: 0.00 Settings -100.00–100.00 % AVI Mid-Point  Default: 5.00 / 10.00 / 12.00 Settings Pr. 03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V Pr. 03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA Pr. 03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA AVI Proportional Mid-Point ...
  • Page 477 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 ACI Lowest Point  Default: 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.00 Settings Pr. 03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.0 mA Pr. 03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V Pr. 03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA ACI Proportional Low Point  Default: 0.00 Settings -100.00–100.00 %...
  • Page 478 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 ACI Highest Point  Default: 20.00 / 10.00 / 20.00 Settings Pr. 03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00mA Pr. 03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00V Pr. 03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00mA ACI Proportional Highest Point  Default: 100.00 Settings -100.00–100.00% ...
  • Page 479 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  The requirement for these three parameters (Pr. 03-63, Pr. 03-65 and Pr. 03-67) is Pr. 03-63 < Pr. 03-65 < Pr. 03-67. The values for three proportional points (Pr. 03-64, Pr. 03-66 and Pr. 03-68) have no limits.
  • Page 480 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 The requirement for these three parameters (Pr. 03-69, Pr. 03-71 and Pr. 03-73) is Pr. 03-69 < Pr.  03-71 < Pr. 03-73. The values for three proportional points (Pr. 03-70, Pr. 03-72 and Pr. 03-74) have not limits.

  • Page 481: Multi-Stage Speed Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. 1st Step Speed Frequency  2nd Step Speed Frequency  3rd Step Speed Frequency  4th Step Speed Frequency  5th Step Speed Frequency ...
  • Page 482 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Position Command 1 (Rotation)  Position Command 2 (Rotation)  Position Command 3 (Rotation)  Position Command 4 (Rotation)  Position Command 5 (Rotation)  Position Command 6 (Rotation)  Position Command 7 (Rotation) ...
  • Page 483 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Multi-step Target Position of P2P Maximum Speed of P2P Speed Status 0000 11-00 bit8=0 11-00 bit8=1 0001 Position 1 04-15 04-16 11-43 04-00 0010 Position 2 04-17 04-18 04-01 0011 Position 3 04-19 04-20 04-02 0100 Position 4...
  • Page 484 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Multi-step position corresponding Multi-step speed corresponding 04-22 Position command 4 (pulse) 04-03 4 step speed frequency 04-24 Position command 5 (pulse) 04-04 5 step speed frequency 04-26 Position command 6 (pulse) 04-05 6 step speed frequency 04-28 Position command 7 (pulse) 04-06 7 step speed frequency...
  • Page 485 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PLC Application Parameter 0  PLC Application Parameter 1  PLC Application Parameter 2  PLC Application Parameter 3  PLC Application Parameter 4  PLC Application Parameter 5  PLC Application Parameter 6 ...

  • Page 486: Motor Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 05 Motor Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Motor Parameter Auto-Tuning Default: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Simple rolling auto-tuning for induction motor (IM) 2: Static auto-tuning for induction motor 4: Dynamic test for PM magnetic pole (with the running in forward direction) 5: Rolling auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM) 6: Advanced rolling auto-tuning for IM flux curve...
  • Page 487 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Number of Poles for Induction Motor 1 Default: 4 Settings 2–64  Sets the number poles for the motor (must be an even number).  Set up Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-03 before setting up Pr. 05-04 to make sure the motor operates normally.
  • Page 488 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Rated Power for Induction Motor 2 (kW)  Default: Depending on the model power Settings 0.00–655.35 kW  Set the rated power for motor 2. The default is the drive’s power value. Rated Speed for Induction Motor 2 (rpm) ...
  • Page 489 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) for Induction Motor 2 Stator Inductance (Lx) for Induction Motor 2 Default: 0.0 Settings 0.0–6553.5 mH Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection Default: 1 Settings 1: Motor 1 2: Motor 2  Sets the motor currently operated by the AC motor drive. Frequency for Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for an Induction Motor ...
  • Page 490 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor (W-hour) Default: 0.0 Settings Read only Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in Low Word (kW-hour) Default: 0.0 Settings Read only Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in High Word (MW-hour) Default: 0 Settings Read only...
  • Page 491 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Min) Default: 0 Settings 1439 – Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Day) Default: 0 Settings 65535 –  Use Pr. 05-31 and Pr. 05-32 to record the motor operation time. To clear the operation time, set Pr. 05-31 and Pr.
  • Page 492 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Rated Power 0.75 [kW] Rotor inertia 15.8 25.7 49.6 82.0 121.6 177.0 [kg-cm Rated Power 54 and 14.1 18.2 [kW] above Rotor inertia 211.0 265.0 308.0 527.0 866.0 1082.0 1267.6 1515.0 [kg-cm Stator Resistance for a Permanent Magnet Motor Default: 0.000 Settings 0.000...

  • Page 493: Protection Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 06 Protection Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Low Voltage Level  Default: Settings 230V series: Frame A–D (including D0): 150.0–220.0 V 180.0 Frame E and above: 190.0–220.0 V 200.0 460V series: Frame A–D (including D0): 300.0–440.0 V 360.0 Frame E and above: 380.0–440.0 V...
  • Page 494 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Setting Pr. 06-01 to 0.0 disables the over-voltage stall prevention function (connected with braking unit or braking resistor). Use this setting when braking units or resistors are connected to the drive.  Setting Pr.06-01 to a value > 0 enables the over-voltage stall prevention. This setting refers to the power supply system and loading.
  • Page 495 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When you set Pr. 06-02 to 1, to use smart over-voltage stall prevention during deceleration, the drive maintains the DC BUS voltage when decelerating and prevents the drive from ov.  When you enable the over-voltage stall prevention, the drive’s deceleration time is longer than the setting.
  • Page 496 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When you enable the over-current stall prevention, the drive’s acceleration time is longer than the setting.  When the over-current stall prevention occurs because the motor capacity is too small or operates in the default, decrease the Pr.06-03 setting value. ...
  • Page 497 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Acceleration / Deceleration Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed  Default: 0 Settings 0: By current acceleration / deceleration time 1: By the 1 acceleration / deceleration time 2: By the 2 acceleration / deceleration time 3: By the 3 acceleration / deceleration time...
  • Page 498 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)  Default: 120 Settings 10–250% (100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive) Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)  Default: 0.1 Settings 0.0–60.0 sec. Over-torque Detection Level (OT2)  Default: 120 Settings 10–250% (100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive) Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)
  • Page 499 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Current Limit  Default: 170 Settings 0–250% (100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive)  Sets the maximum output current of the drive. Use Pr.11-17–Pr.11-20 to set the drive’s output current limit. ...
  • Page 500 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  The action of electronic thermal relay depends on the setting for Pr. 06-13 and Pr. 06-27. 1. Pr. 06-13 or Pr. 06-27 set to 0 (using inverter motor): When the output current of motor drive is higher than 150% of motor rated current (refer to the motor cooling curve with independent fan), motor drive starts to count the time.
  • Page 501 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Stall Prevention Limit Level (Weak Magnetic Area Current Stall Prevention Level)  Default: 100 Settings 0–100% (Refer to Pr. 06-03, Pr. 06-04)  Sets the over-current stall prevention level when operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01. This parameter only works during acceleration.
  • Page 502 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 26: Over-torque 1 (ot1) 27: Over-torque 2 (ot2) 28: Low current (uC) 29: Home limit error (LMIT) 30: Memory write-in error (cF1) 31: Memory read-out error (cF2) 33: U-phase current detection error (cd1) 34: V-phase current detection error (cd2) 35: W-phase current detection error (cd3) 36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) 37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
  • Page 503 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 76: Safe Torque Off (STO) 77: Channel 2 (STO2–SCM2) safety loop error (STL2) 78: Internal loop error (STL3) 82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL) 83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL) 84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL) 85: PG-02U ABZ hardware disconnection 86: PG-02U UVW hardware disconnection 87: oL3 Low frequency overload protection...
  • Page 504 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 Fault Code current Volt. 0: No fault record 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ● 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ● 3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn) ● 4: Ground fault (GFF) ●...
  • Page 505 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 Fault Code current Volt. 41: PID feedback loss (AFE) ● 42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ● 43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ● 44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ●...
  • Page 506 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 Fault Code current Volt. 89: Initial rotor position detection error ● 90: Inner PLC function is forced to stop ● 101: CANopen software disconnect 1 (CGdE) ● 102: CANopen software disconnect 2 (CHbE) ●...
  • Page 507 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Output Frequency at Malfunction Default: Read only Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  When a malfunction occurs, check the current output frequency. If it happens again, it overwrites the previous record. Output Voltage at Malfunction Default: Read only Settings 0.0–6553.5 V ...
  • Page 508 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Torque Command at Malfunction Default: Read only Settings -32767–32767%  When a malfunction occurs, check the current torque command. If it happens again, it overwrites the previous record. Status of the Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction Default: Read only Settings 0000h–FFFFh...
  • Page 509 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Current Detection Level for Output Phase Loss  Default: 1.00 Settings 0.00–100.00% DC Brake Time of Output Phase Loss  Default: 0.000 Settings 0.000–65.535 sec.  Setting Pr. 06-48 to 0 disables the OPHL detection function. ...
  • Page 510 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Status 3: The drive is in STOP; Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0; Pr. 07-02 ≠ 0 When the drive starts, it executes Pr. 06-48 first, and then executes Pr. 07-02 (DC brake). The DC brake current level in this state includes two parts: one is 20 times the Pr.
  • Page 511 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Status 4: The drive is in STOP; Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0; Pr. 07-02 = 0 When the drive starts, it executes Pr. 06-48 as the DC brake. The DC brake current level is 20 times the Pr.
  • Page 512 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Capacitor oH Warning Level Default: Depending on the model power Settings 0.0–110.0 degree  Sets the over-heat warning level of the drive’s internal DCBUS capacitor.  When the setting is less than 10.0 degree, the drive uses its internal capacitor oH warning level. Ripple of Input Phase Loss ...
  • Page 513 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Refer to Section 9-7 “Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature” for the level of carrier frequency. Take VFD007C43A Normal Duty for example: ambient temperature 50ºC, UL Open Type, and independent installation. When the carrier frequency is set to 15kHz, it corresponds to 75% of the rated output current.
  • Page 514 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PT100 Activation Level 1 Protection Frequency Delay Time  Default: 60 Settings 0–6000 sec.  PT100 operation instructions (1) Use voltage type analog input (AVI, AUI, and ACI voltage 0–10 V) and select PT100 mode. (2) Select one of the voltage type analog inputs below: (a) AVI (Pr.
  • Page 515 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When Pr. 06-58 = 0.00Hz, PT100 function is disabled. Example: When using PT100, if the motor temperature is higher than 135ºC (275°F), the drive starts to count the delay time for auto-deceleration (Pr. 06-59). The drive decreases the motor frequency to the setting for Pr.
  • Page 516 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Day) Operation Time of Fault Record 2 (Day) Operation Time of Fault Record 3 (Day) Operation Time of Fault Record 4 (Day) Default: Read only Settings 0–65535 days Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Min.) Operation Time of Fault Record 2 (Min.) Operation Time of Fault Record 3 (Min.)
  • Page 517 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Low Current Setting Level  Default: 0.0 Settings 0.0–100.0 % Low Current Detection Time  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–360.00 sec. Low Current Action  Default: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Warn and coast to stop 2: Warn and ramp to stop by the 2 deceleration time 3: Warn and continue operation...
  • Page 518 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 C2000 / KTY84-130 Temperature and voltage diagram T (°C) y = 79.717x - 156.64 C2000 Linear (C2000) 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 -100 Analog voltage (V)  When the temperature exceeds the setting level, an oH3 error occurs to the drive. Reset conditions: when the temperature is below the trigger level -5ºC, the oH3 error is cleared.

  • Page 519: Special Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 07 Special Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Software Brake Level  Default: 370.0/740.0/895.0/1057.0 Settings 230V series: 350.0–450.0 V 460V series: 700.0–900.0 V 575V series: 850.0–1116.0 V 690V series: 939.0–1318.0 V ...
  • Page 520 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  This parameter determines the duration of the DC brake current output to the motor when braking. To enable DC brake at STOP, set Pr. 00-22 (Stop Method) to 0 (ramp to stop). The DC brake is invalid when Pr.
  • Page 521 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 For example, in equipment with a large inertia flywheel, there is NO need to wait until the flywheel stops completely after a restart to execute the operation command; therefore, it saves time.  Setting 2: Frequency tracking starts from the minimum output frequency and accelerates to the master Frequency command after the drive output frequency and motor rotator speed are synchronous.
  • Page 522 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12.1-07-4...
  • Page 523 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Current Limit of Speed Tracking  Default: 100 Settings 20–200%  The AC motor drive executes speed tracking only if the output current is greater than the value set in Pr. 07-09.  The maximum current for speed tracking affects the synchronous time. The larger the parameter setting is, the faster the synchronization occurs.
  • Page 524 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When using PM, Pr. 07-12 ≠ 0, the speed tracking function is enabled. When Pr. 07-12 = 1, 2 or 3, the output frequency converts to the actual rotor speed from zero-speed. dEb Function Selection ...
  • Page 525 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Situation 2: Momentary power loss, or power current too low and unstable, or power supply sliding down because of sudden heavy load. Pr. 07-13=2 “dEb active, DC BUS voltage returns, output frequency returns” and power recovers.
  • Page 526 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Situation 3: Power supply unexpected shut down or power loss Pr. 07-13=1 “dEb active, DC BUS voltage returns, the output frequency does not return” and the power does not recover. The keypad displays the “dEb” warning and stops after decelerating to the lowest running frequency.
  • Page 527 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 (1) When dEb activates, it sends dEb warning. When the output frequency reaches 0Hz, the operation status is STOP and disables the dEb function, the dEb warning continues. (2) If power does not recover, the DC BUS voltage drops until reaches the Lv level, the drive LvS error occurs (keypad displays LvS error that covers the dEb display), the Soft Start Relay will be OFF.
  • Page 528 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Fan Cooling Control  Default: 0 Settings 0: Fan always ON 1: Fan is OFF after AC motor drive stops for one minute 2: Fan is ON when AC motor drive runs; fan is OFF when AC motor drive stops 3: Fan turns ON when temperature (IGBT) reaches around 60 4: Fan always OFF...
  • Page 529 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Automatic Energy-saving Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Enable  When energy-saving is enabled, the motor acceleration operates with full voltage. During constant speed operation, it automatically calculates the best voltage value according to the load power.
  • Page 530 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  VF, VFPG, SVC mode: Steady-speed: When output is light load, entry into energy saving mode after 5 seconds. Return: When the drive is continuously adding loads, or in non-steady speed status.  FOCPM and FOC sensorless control mode, disable. Energy-saving Gain ...
  • Page 531 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  1: When the AVR function is disabled, the drive calculates the output voltage according to the actual DC BUS voltage. The DC BUS voltage changes the output voltage, and may cause insufficient or over-current or shock. ...
  • Page 532 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)  Default: 0.00 (1.00 in SVC mode) Settings 0.00–10.00  The induction motor needs constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignored at higher motor speeds, such as rated speed or 2–3% of slip.
  • Page 533 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Motor Shock Compensation Factor  Default: 1000 Settings 0–10000 0: Disable  If there are current wave motions in the motor in some specific area, setting this parameter can effectively improve this situation. When running with high frequency or PG, set this parameter to 0. When the current wave motion occurs in low frequency and high-power, increase the value for Pr.

  • Page 534: High-Function Pid Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 08 High-function PID Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Terminal Selection of PID Feedback  Default:0 Settings 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00–03-02) 2: Negative PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, without direction (Pr.
  • Page 535 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Master Frequency Command (AUTO) Source / Source Selection of the PID Target Default: 0 Settings 0: Digital keypad 1: RS-485 serial communication 2: External analog input (Refer to Pr. 03-00) 3: External UP/DOWN terminal 4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.
  • Page 536 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Concept of PID control  Proportional gain (P): The output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there is always a steady-state error. Adjustment: Turn off the Ti and Td, or remain Ti and Td in constant value, then adjust the proportional gain (P).
  • Page 537 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Pr. 00-04 = 10 (Display PID feedback (b) (%)).  Pr. 01-12 Acceleration Time is set as according to actual conditions.  Pr. 01-13 Deceleration Time is set as according to actual conditions.  Pr.
  • Page 538 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 The smaller the integral time, the stronger integral action. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation for a stable system. Accordingly, the speed to lower the steady-state error decreases. The integral control is often used with the other two controls for the PI controller or PID controller.
  • Page 539 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PID Feedback Value by Communication Protocol  Default: Read only Settings -200.00%–200.00%  Use communication to set the PID feedback value when the PID feedback input is set to communication (Pr.08-00 = 7 or 8). PID Delay Time ...
  • Page 540 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Serial Connection Parallel Connection Feedback Signal Detection Time  Default: 0.0 Settings 0.0–3600.0 sec.  Pr. 08-08 is valid only for ACI 4–20mA.  This parameter sets the detection time for abnormal PID signal feedback. Setting the detection time to 0.0 disables the detection function.
  • Page 541 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Wake-up Frequency  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  When Pr. 08-18 = 0, the unit for Pr. 08-10 and that for Pr. 08-11 switch to frequency. The settings are become 0–600.00 Hz.  When Pr. 08-18=1, the unit for Pr. 08-10 and that for Pr. 08-11 switch to percentage. The settings then are to 0–200.00%.
  • Page 542 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PID Compensation  Default: 0.0 Settings -100.0–100.0%  The PID compensation value = maximum PID target value × Pr. 08-17. For example, if the maximum operaiton frequency Pr. 01-00 = 60.00 Hz, Pr. 08-17 = 10.0%, the PID compensation value increases the output frequency 6.00Hz.
  • Page 543 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 1) Frequency Command (PID is not in use, Pr. 08-00 = 0, only works in VF mode) When the output frequency ≤ the sleep frequency, and the drive reaches the preset sleep time, then the the drive is in sleep mode. When the frequency command reaches the wake-up frequency, the drive starts to count the wake-up delay time.
  • Page 544 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 3) PID Feedback Rate Percentage (Use PID, Pr. 08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr. 08-18 = 1) When the PID feedback rate reaches the sleep level percentage, the drive starts to count the sleep time. The output frequency also decreases. If the drive exceeds the preset sleep time, it goes to sleep mode (0 Hz).
  • Page 545 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Example 02: PID positive feedback Pr. 08-10 must < Pr. 08-11  Area 30kg is the reference  Physical quantity Set the parameter:  >36kg, the drive goes Pr. 03-00 = 5 (AVI is PID feedback) Sleep area into sleepmotor goes Pr.

  • Page 546: Communication Parameters

    Modbus RS- 485 When us ing communication devi ces, Pin 1~2,7,8: Reserv ed connects AC dr ive with P C by us ing Pin 3, 6: GND Delta IFD6530 or IFD6500. Pin 4: SG- Pin 5: SG+ RS-485 Communication Address ...
  • Page 547 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 8：8, E, 1 (ASCII) 9：8, O, 1 (ASCII) 10：8, E, 2 (ASCII) 11：8, O, 2 (ASCII) 12：8, N, 1 (RTU) 13：8, N, 2 (RTU) 14：8, E, 1 (RTU) 15：8, O, 1 (RTU) 16：8, E, 2 (RTU) 17：8, O, 2 (RTU) ...
  • Page 548 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 (7, O, 1) Start Stop parity 7-data bits 10-bits character frame 11-bit character frame (For RTU): (8, N, 2) Start Stop Stop 8-data bits 11-bits character frame (8, E, 1) Start Even Stop parity 8-data bits 11-bits character frame (8, O, 1)
  • Page 549 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 RTU mode: START Defined by a silent interval of more than 10 ms Address Communication address: 8-bit address Function Command code: 8-bit command DATA (n-1) Contents of data: ……. N × 8-bit data, n ≤ 16 DATA 0 CRC Check Low CRC checksum:...
  • Page 550 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 RTU mode: Command Message: Response Message Address Address Function Function Number of register Starting data register (count by byte) Number of register Content of register (count by word) address 2102H CRC Check Low Content of register address 2103H CRC Check High CRC Check Low...
  • Page 551 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 ASCII Mode Command Message: Response Message ‘:’ ‘:’ ADR 1 ‘0’ ‘0’ ADR 1 ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘5’...
  • Page 552 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 RTU mode: CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps: Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFh. Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
  • Page 553 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 4. Address list AC motor drive parameters Modbus Function address GG is the parameter group, nn is the parameter number; for example, the address of GGnnH Pr. 04-10 is 040AH. Control command (20xx) Modbus Function address 00B: No function...
  • Page 554 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Modbus Function address AC motor drive operation status bit1–0 00B: Drive stops 01B: Drive decelerating 10B: Drive standby 11B: Drive operating bit2 1：JOG Command Operation Direction bit4–3 00B: FWD run 01B: From REV run to FWD run 10B: From FWD run to REV run 2101H 11B: REV run...
  • Page 555 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Modbus Function address 2205H Power angle (XXX.X) 2206H Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (XXXXX kW) Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder feedback 2207H (XXXXX rpm) Display positive/negative output torque in %, estimated by the drive (t0.0: 2208H positive torque, -0.0: negative torque) (XXX.X %)
  • Page 556 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Modbus Function address bit5 0b: No alarm 1b: Alarm 2227H Drive’s estimated output torque (positive or negative direction) (XXXX Nt-m) 2228H Torque command (XXX.X %) 2229H kWh display (XXXX.X) 222AH PG2 pulse input in Low Word 222BH PG2 pulse input in High Word 222CH...
  • Page 557 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Example: ASCII mode: RTU mode: ‘:’ Address ‘0’ Function Address ‘1’ Exception code ‘8’ CRC Check Low Function ‘6’ CRC Check High ‘0’ Exception code ‘2’ ‘7’ LRC Check ‘7’ The explanation of exception codes: Error code Explanation Function code is not supported or unrecognized.
  • Page 558 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Block Transfer 10  Block Transfer 11  Block Transfer 12  Block Transfer 13  Block Transfer 14  Block Transfer 15  Block Transfer 16  Default: 0000h Settings 0000–FFFFh  There is a group of block transfer parameters available in the AC motor drive (Pr. 09-11–Pr. 09-26).
  • Page 559 1–127 CANopen Speed Default: 0 Settings 0: 1Mbps 1: 500Kbps 2: 250Kbps 3: 125Kbps 4: 100Kbps (Delta only) 5: 50Kbps CANopen Warning Record Default: Read only Settings bit0: CANopen Guarding Time-out bit1: CANopen Heartbeat Time-out bit2: CANopen SYNC Time-out bit3: CANopen SDO Time-out...
  • Page 560 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 CANopen Decoding Method Default: 1 Settings 0: Disable (Delta-defined decoding method) 1: Enable (CANopen DS402 Standard protocol) CANopen Communication Status Default: 0 Settings 0: Node Reset State 1: Com Reset State 2: Boot up State...
  • Page 561 Communication Card Speed Setting (for DeviceNet)  Default: 2 Settings Standard DeviceNet: 0: 125Kbps 1: 250Kbps 2: 500Kbps 3: 1Mbps (Delta only) Non-standard DeviceNet: (Delta only) 0: 10Kbps 1: 20Kbps 2: 50Kbps 3: 100Kbps 4: 125Kbps 5: 250Kbps 6: 500Kbps...
  • Page 562 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Setting 1: The DeviceNet communication rate can be the same as that for CANopen (setting 0–8). Communication Card IP Configuration (for MODBUS TCP)  Default: 0 Settings 0: Static IP 1: Dynamic IP (DHCP) ...
  • Page 563 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Additional Settings for the Communication Card (for MODBUS TCP)  Default: 1 Settings bit0: Enable IP Filter bit1: Enable internet parameters (1bit) When IP address is set, this bit is enabled. After updating the communication card parameters, this bit changes to disabled.

  • Page 564: Feedback Control Parameters

     When using EMC-PG01U, set Pr. 10-00=2 (Delta encoder), and make sure SW1 is switched to D (Delta type). If the setting for Pr. 10-00, Pr. 10-01 and Pr. 10-02 has changed, please turn off the drive’s power and reboot to prevent permanent magnetic motor (PM) stall. This mode is recommended to use for PM.
  • Page 565 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Encoder Input Type Setting Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the A-phase leads the B-phase by 90 degrees. 2: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the B-phase leads the A-phase by 90 degrees.
  • Page 566 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 10-01 and Pr. 10-02 are changed, cycle the power of the motor drive. 1. The speed formula is (input ppr) / (PG1 ppr), when PG1 ppt = 2500, PG2 is single-phase input, and the input pps is 1000 (1000 pulse per second), the speed should be (1000 / 2500) = 0.40Hz.
  • Page 567 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When the speed controller signal is abnormal, if time exceeds the detection time for the encoder feedback fault (Pr. 10-09), the feedback fault occurs. Refer to Pr. 10-08 for the encoder feedback fault treatment. Encoder / Speed Observer Stall Level ...
  • Page 568 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Pulse Input Type Setting  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the A-phase leads the B-phase by 90 degrees. 2: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the B-phase leads the A-phase by 90 degrees.
  • Page 569 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Setting procedure of MI8 single-phase pulse input:  Pr. 00-20=4, Pulse input without direction command Pr.10-01 set as the ppr number of each rotation. Pr.10-16=5, MI8 single-phase pulse input MI8 input and PG2 input could both exist at the same time. But PG card Pr. 10-00 and Pr. 10-16 ...
  • Page 570 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 FOC & TQC Function Control  Default: 0 Settings bit0: ASR controller under torque control (0: use PI as ASR; 1: use P as ASR) bit11: Activate DC brake when executing the zero torque command (0: ON;...
  • Page 571 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  If the application needs a higher setting for Pr. 10-29, note that a higher setting results in larger motor slip, which causes a PG Error (PGF3, PGF4). In this case, you can set Pr. 10-10 and Pr. 10-13 to 0 to disable PGF3 and PGF4 detection, but you must make sure the PG wiring and application are correct;...
  • Page 572 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 If entering the low magnetic area and the input voltage (or DC BUS) plummets (e.g. an unstable  power net causes instant insufficient voltage, or a sudden load that makes DC BUS drop), which causes the ACR diverge and oc, then increase the gain.
  • Page 573 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 If you want to slowly increase the size of Id, increase the filter time to avoid a Step phenomenon  occurs when starting current output. When decrease the filter time (minimum value is 0), the current rises faster, then a Step phenomenon occurs.
  • Page 574 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Decrease the parameter setting to prevent large reverse angle. If the tolerance is bigger, then increase the parameter setting. If the load is too large at this moment, it may cause oc. Injection Frequency ...

  • Page 575: Advanced Parameters

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 11 Advanced Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. In this parameter group, ASR stands for Adjust Speed Regulator System Control Default: 0000h Settings bit0: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR bit1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode) bit2: Zero servo bit6: 0Hz linear-cross bit7: Save or do not save the frequency...
  • Page 576 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  bit1=0: no function. bit1=1: Inertia estimation function is enabled. bit1 setting would not activate the estimation process, set Pr. 05-00=12 to begin FOC/TQC Sensorless inertia estimating.  bit2=0: no function. bit2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr. 01-07), it will use the zero-servo function as position control.
  • Page 577 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 starts and stops. Forward / reverse rotation crosses the zero point in linear. bit6=0: The S acceleration / deceleration curves (Pr. 01-24–Pr. 01-27) affect the drive starts and stops. Forward / reverse rotation crosses the zero point after the S-Curve. Pr.
  • Page 578 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Unit of induction motor system inertia is kg-cm Power Setting Power Setting Power Setting 25HP 142.8 175HP 2150.0 30HP 176.5 250HP 2800.0 40HP 202.5 300HP 3550.0 14.8 50HP 355.5 375HP 5139.0 7.5HP 26.0 60HP 410.8 425HP 5981.0...
  • Page 579 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 ASR 2 Gain  Default: 10 Settings 0–40 Hz (IM) / 0–100Hz (PM) ASR 2 Integral Time  Default: 0.100 Settings 0.000–10.000 sec. ASR Gain of Zero Speed  Default: 10 Settings 0–40 Hz (IM) / 0–100Hz (PM) ASR Integral Time of Zero Speed ...
  • Page 580 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Set Pr.11-01 correctly to get excellent improvement of the speed response. ASR Output Low-pass Filter Time  Default: 0.008 Settings 0.000–0.350 sec.  Use this to set the ASR command filter time. Notch Filter Depth ...
  • Page 581 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Pr. 11-17–Pr. 11-20 limit the output current, the percentage base value is the drive’s rated current (not the motor’s rated current). The minimum value between Pr. 11-17–11-20 and Pr.06-12 becomes the current output limit. In acceleration and steady state operation, when the output current reaches the limit, the ocA (over-current during acceleration) protection or over-current stall prevention under steady-state operation acts.
  • Page 582 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2 Gain Value  Default: 90 Settings 0–200%  Adjusts the output voltage for the flux-weakening curve.  For the spindle application, use this adjustment method: 1. Use it to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency. 2.
  • Page 583 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Max. Torque Command  Default: 100 Settings 0–500%  Determines the upper limit of the torque command (motor rated torque is 100%).  Calculation equation for the motor rated torque:  Motor rated torque: ;...
  • Page 584 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 High Torque Compensation  Default: 30.0 Settings -100.0%–100.0% Middle Torque Compensation  Default: 20.0 Settings -100.0%–100.0% Low Torque Compensation  Default: 10.0 Settings -100.0%–100.0%  When Pr. 11-28 is set to 3, the torque-offset source uses Pr. 11-30, Pr. 11-31 or Pr. 11-32 determined by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33).
  • Page 585 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Speed Limit Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: Set by Pr. 11-37 (Forward Speed Limit) and Pr. 11-38 (Reverse Speed Limit) 1: Set by Pr. 11-37, Pr. 11-38 and Pr. 00-20 (Source of Master Frequency Command) 2: Set by Pr.
  • Page 586 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Reverse Speed Limit (Torque Mode)  Default: 10 Settings 0–120%  These parameters define the speed limit in the forward and reverse directions in torque mode (Pr. 01-00 maximum operation frequency = 100%). Zero Torque Command Mode Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: Torque mode...
  • Page 587 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Point-to-Point Position Control Deceleration Time  Default: 3.00 Settings 0.00–655.35 sec. Torque Output Filter Gain Default: 0.050 Settings 0.000–65.535  Sets the filter gain of the torque output display (keypad display and communication read), including Pr.

  • Page 588: Application Parameters By Industry

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 13 Application Parameters by Industry  This parameter can be set during operation. Application Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: Disabled 1: User-defined Parameter 2: Compressor (IM) 3: Fan 4: Pump 10: Air Handling Unit, AHU ...
  • Page 589 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Group setting 03: Fan The following table lists the relevant fan setting application parameters. Explanation Settings 00-11 Speed control mode 0 (V/F control) 00-16 Load selection 0 (Normal load) 00-17 Carrier frequency Default setting Master frequency command source (AUTO) 00-20 2 (External analog input)
  • Page 590 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Group setting 04: Pump The following table lists the relevant pump setting application parameters. Explanation Settings 00-11 Speed control mode 0 (V/F control) 00-16 Load Selection 0 (Normal load) Master frequency command source (AUTO) 00-20 2 (External analog input) / Source selection of the PID target...
  • Page 591 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Group setting 10: Air Handling Unit, AHU The following table lists the relevant AHU setting application parameters. Explanation Settings 00-04 Content of multi-function display 00-11 Speed control mode 0 (V/F control) 00-16 Load Selection 0 (Normal load) Master frequency command source (AUTO) 00-20...

  • Page 592: Extension Card Parameter

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 14 Extension Card Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation. Extension Card Input Terminal Selection (AI10)  Extension Card Input Terminal Selection (AI11)  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Frequency command 2: Torque command (torque limit in speed mode) 3: Torque compensation command 4: PID target value...
  • Page 593 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  When the setting for Pr. 14-18 or Pr. 14-19 are 0 or 1, the voltage input to AVI and ACI terminal is 0–10 V or 4–20 mA. At this moment, Pr. 14-10 and Pr. 14-11 are invalid. ...
  • Page 594 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Analog Output 1 Gain (AO10)  Analog Output 1 Gain (AO11)  Default: 100.0 Settings 0.0–500.0% Adjusts the voltage level outputted to the analog meter from the analog signal (Pr. 14-12,  Pr. 14-13) output terminal AFM of the drive. Analog Output 1 in REV Direction (AO10) ...
  • Page 595 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 AO10 Filter Output Time  AO11 Filter Output Time  Default: 0.01 Settings 0.00–20.00 sec. AO10 Output Selection  AO11 Output Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: 0–10V 1: 0–20mA 2: 4–20mA 12.1-14-4...

  • Page 596: Adjustment & Application

    Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12-2 Adjustment & Application 12-2-1 Standard IM Motor Adjustment Procedure Flow chart 12.2-00-1...
  • Page 597 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 FOC sensorless control diagram Adjustment procedure 1. Parameter reset to default, Pr.00-02 = 10 or 9 (To avoid other parameters that are not related affecting the motor controlling) 2. Set up motor parameters according to the nameplate on the motor Pr.
  • Page 598 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 3. Press “RUN” to start auto-tuning of IM magnetic flux curve dynamic test for Pr.05-00 = 1 or 6 (motor is running). Make sure the motor executes auto-tuning under break-away load condition. Check if there are motor parameters after auto-tuning.
  • Page 599 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 The low-speed bandwidth cannot be set too high, or the observer will diverge. 7. Adjust the setting of FOC speed observer and per-unit value of inertia (common problems) Pr. 10-25: Set up FOC bandwidth of speed observer ...
  • Page 600 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Output Voltage of Motor 1 (Base Frequency and Motor Rated Frequency) Default: 200.0/ 400.0/ 575.0/ 660.0 Settings 230V series: 0.0–255.0V 460V series: 0.0–510.0V 575V series: 0.0–637.0V 690V series: 0.0–765.0V Set this value according to the motor’s rated voltage from the motor’s nameplate. If the motor’s ...
  • Page 601 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Number of Poles for Induction Motor 1 Default: 4 Settings 2–64 Sets the number poles for the motor (must be an even number).   Set up Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-03 before setting up Pr. 05-04 to make sure the motor operates normally.
  • Page 602 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 bit0 = 0: Manual adjustment for ASR and APR gain, Pr. 11-06–Pr. 11-11 are valid and Pr.  11-03–Pr. 11-05 are invalid. bit0 = 1: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR gain, the system automatically generates an ASR setting, Pr.
  • Page 603 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  bit1 = 0: no function. bit1 = 1: Inertia estimation function is enabled. bit1 setting would not activate the estimation process, set Pr. 05-00 = 12 to begin FOC / TQC Sensorless inertia estimating. Per Unit of System Inertia Default: 256 Settings...
  • Page 604 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Unit of induction motor system inertia is kg-cm Power Setting Power Setting Power Setting 25HP 142.8 175HP 2150.0 30HP 176.5 250HP 2800.0 40HP 202.5 300HP 3550.0 14.8 50HP 355.5 375HP 5139.0 7.5HP 26.0 60HP 410.8 425HP 5981.0...
  • Page 605 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12-2-2 Standard PM Motor Adjustment Procedure 12-2-2-1 Pr.00-11=4 PM FOC+PG 1. Control Diagram (A) PM FOC+PG Control Diagram (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above) (B) PM TQC+PG Control Diagram (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above) 12.2-00-10...
  • Page 606 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 2. PM FOC+PG Adjustment Procedure (* the number marked on the procedure corresponds to the number of following adjustment explanations)  PM FOC+PG Motor Parameter Adjustment Procedure 12.2-00-11...
  • Page 607 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 7.Re-power after Power Off 8.PM Motor Inertia Estimation 1) Pr.00-11=4 FOCPG control 2) Set the running frequency to 2/3 of the motor rated frequency. 3) Set the accel./decel. time as 1/10 of the default value. (Adjust the accel./decel time based on the load inertia.
  • Page 608 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Description Pr.05-35 Rated power (kW) Pr.05-36 Rated rotor speed (RPM) Pr.05-37 Number of poles for the motor (poles) 4. PM parameter auto-tuning: Rolling auto-tuning for PM (without load) Pr.05-00=5 or static auto-tuning for PM (Pr.05-00=13) Set Pr.05-00=5 or 13 and press “RUN”...
  • Page 609 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 7. Cycle the power. 8. Execute inertia estimation for PM (1) Set Pr. 00-11 = 4 FOCPG control. (2) Set the operation frequency command to 2/3 of the motor’s rated frequency. (3) Set the acceleration / deceleration time (Pr. 01-12, Pr. 01-13) to 1/10 of the default time. (Adjust the acceleration / deceleration time according to the load inertia.
  • Page 610 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 PM FOC+PG No-load/ Light-load Adjustment Procedure 9.No-load Trial Run Set 10Hz frequency command to proceed encoder running test Set Pr.10-02 input =2 A1. Start running in (Phase B leads 90 degree the reverse direction? in a forward run command the phase A) PGF Error Type:...
  • Page 611 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  No-load/ Light duty Running Adjustment 9. No-load trial run Set the frequency command to 10Hz to proceed the encoder running test: A1. If the motor starts in a reverse direction. If the motor starts in a reverse direction, set the encoder input type Pr. 10-02 = 2 (phases A and B are pulse inputs, forward direction if B-phase leads A-phase by 90 degrees.) A2.
  • Page 612 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Parameter Description Default Pr.11-00 System control Pr.11-01 Per unit of system inertia ASR1/ASR2 switch frequency Pr.11-02 (it is suggested to set the switch frequency higher than Pr.10-39) Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 10Hz Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 10Hz Pr.11-05 ASR zero-speed bandwidth...
  • Page 613 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 C2. With-load accelerating performance testing in heavy-load status, accelerate the motor to the rated rotor speed according to the acceleration time. a. If the motor rotor speed cannot follow the acceleration time, and the response is too slow, increase Pr.11-04 (ASR2 high-speed bandwidth) and Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth);...
  • Page 614 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12-2-3 PM Motor Adjustment (PM SVC) 12-2-3-1 Permanent magnet motor space vector control (PM SVC) Pr. 00-11 = 2 1. Control Diagram PM SVC control diagram (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above) 12.2-00-19...
  • Page 615 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 2. PM SVC Adjustment Procedure (* the number marked on the procedure corresponds to the number of following adjustment explanations) I. PM SVC motor parameters adjustment 12.2-00-20...
  • Page 616 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Basic Motor Parameters Adjustment 1. Parameter reset: Pr.00-02=9 (50Hz) or 10 (60Hz), reset parameter to the default value. 2. Select PM motor type: Pr.05-33=1 (SPM) or 2 (IPM) 3. Motor nameplate parameter setting: Parameter Description Pr.01-01...
  • Page 617 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 7. Measure the initial magnetic pole angle of PM Set Pr.10-53 PM initial rotor position detection method 0: Disable 1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to zero degrees 2: High frequency injection 3: Pulse injection (Set to 2 for IPM;...
  • Page 618 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Adjustment for Operation with Light duty 8. Start the motor with no-duty / light-duty, and operates to 1/2 of the rated rotor speed A1. Start operation direction: a. If the start operation direction is wrong SPM: increase the current proportion for Pr.
  • Page 619 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 III. PM SVC Carrier Start-up Adjustment 12.2-00-24...
  • Page 620 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Heavy Load Operation Adjustment 9. Load operating test B1. Low-frequency loading performance is below 1/10 of rated frequency: a. If the low-frequency loading performance is insufficient, or the rotor speed is not smooth, increase Pr.
  • Page 621 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 12-2-4 IPM Adjustment 12-2-4-1 Pr.00-11=7 Interior PM FOC sensorless vector control (IPM sensorless) 1. Control Diagram IPM sensorless FOC mode (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above) ※ PM Sensorless FOC control is the control method dedicated for IPM, it uses the high salient pole characteristic (Lq >...
  • Page 622 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 2. IPM Sensorless FOC Control Adjustment Procedure (* the number marked on the procedure corresponds the number of following adjustment explanations) I. IPM Sensoress FOC Mode Motor Parameters Adjustment PM FOC Sensorless 1. Parameter Reset Adjustment Procedure Pr.00-02=9 or 10 （Ver.2.04 and above)
  • Page 623 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Basic Motor Parameters Adjustment Parameter reset: Pr.00-02=9 (50Hz) or 10 (60Hz), reset parameter to the default value. Select IPM motor type: Pr.05-33=2 (IPM) Motor nameplate parameter setting: Parameter Description Pr.01-01 Rated frequency (Hz) Pr.01-02 Rated voltage (V Pr.05-33...
  • Page 624 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 II. IPM Sensorless FOC Mode – No-load / Light-duty Adjustment 8. No-load Running (a) Set speed regulator ASR Pr.11-00=1 ASR auto-tuning (b) No-load started to ½ rated rotor speed Increase Pr.10-52 injection magnitude Increase Pr.10-52 Increase Pr.10-42 initial angle detection Angle detection of high pulse value...
  • Page 625 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  No-load / Light-duty Operation Adjustment 8. Start the motor with no-duty (a) Set Pr.11-00 = 1 Auto-tuning for ASR and APR (b) Start the motor without load, and operates the motor to 1/2 of rated rotor speed a.
  • Page 626 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 III. IPM Sensoress FOC Mode – Load Starting Adjustment 10. Running Test with Load B1. Low-frequency loaded performance （Frequency of Pr.10-39 and below） Increase ASR1 bandwidth Decrease ASR1 bandwidth Pr.11-03 Pr.11-03 Increase system inertia Decrease system inertia Pr.11-01 Pr.11-01...
  • Page 627 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000  Load Operation Adjustment 10. Load operating test B1. Low-frequency loading performance, when the switch frequency is below Pr.10-39: a. When the low-frequency cannot start the motor with load, or the rotor speed is not smooth, increase Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth) or Pr.11-01 (Per-unit of system inertia);...

  • Page 628: Chapter 13 Warning Codes

    Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Chapter 13 Warning Codes ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Communication error 1 RS-485 Modbus illegal function code (CE1) Action and Reset Action level When the function code is not 03, 06, 10 and 63 Action time Immediately act Warning setting parameter...
  • Page 629 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Communication error 3 RS-485 Modbus illegal data value (CE3) Action and Reset Action level When the length of communication data is too long Action time Immediately act Warning setting parameter “Warning”...
  • Page 630 Keypad error Check if the error occurs randomly, or only occurs when copying certain parameters (the error displays on the upper right corner of the copy page). If you Control board error cannot clear the error, please contact Delta. 13-3...
  • Page 631 It is suggested to check the status of Data ROM and remove the error causes first. If you cannot clear the error, please contact Delta. Verify the wiring and grounding of the main circuit, control circuit and the Malfunction caused by interference encoder for effective anti-interference performance.
  • Page 632 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Capacitor over-heat The drive has detected over heat of the capacitor warning (oH2) Action and Reset Action level oH2 error level minus (–) 5°C The oH2 warning occurs when the capacitor temperature is higher than oH2 Action time warning level Warning setting parameter...
  • Page 633 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 oH warning Model oH1 warning = (Pr.06-15) VFD110C43A/E VFD150C43A/E VFD185C43A/E VFD220C43A/E VFD300C43A/E VFD370C43S/U VFD450C43S/U VFD550C43A/E VFD750C43A/E oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5 VFD900C43A/E oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5 VFD1100C43A/E VFD1320C43A/E VFD1600C43A/E VFD1850C43A/E VFD2200C43A/E VFD2800C43A/E VFD3150C43A/E VFD3550C43A/E VFD4500C43A/E VFD015C53A...
  • Page 634 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description PID feedback error PID feedback loss (warning for analog feedback signal; (PID) works only when PID enables) Action and Reset Action level When the analog input is lower than 4mA (only detects analog input of 4–20mA) Action time Pr.
  • Page 635 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Under current Low current (uC) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-71 Action time Pr. 06-72 Pr. 06-73 0: No function Warning setting parameter 1: Warn and coast to stop 2: Warn and ramp to stop by 2 deceleration time 3: Warn and operation continue...
  • Page 636 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Over speed warning Over speed warning (oSPd) Action and Reset Action level The encoder feedback speed > Pr. 10-10 Action time Pr. 10-11 Pr. 10-12=0 Warning setting parameter 0: Warn and keep operation Reset method “Warning”...
  • Page 637 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Phase loss Input phase loss warning (PHL) Action and Reset Action level One of the phases outputs less than Pr. 06-47 Action time Pr. 06-46 Pr. 06-45=0 Warning setting parameter 0: Warn and keep operation Reset method...
  • Page 638 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Over-torque 1 Over-torque 1 warning (ot1) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-07 Action time Pr. 06-08 Pr. 06-06=1 or 3 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed Warning setting parameter operation 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation...
  • Page 639 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Over-torque Over-torque 2 warning (ot2) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-10 Action time Pr. 06-11 Pr. 06-09=1 or 3 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed Warning setting parameter operation 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation...
  • Page 640 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Motor over-heating warning. Motor over-heating 22_1 The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside the (oH3) PTC motor is too high Action and Reset Action level Pr. 03-00=6 (PTC), PTC input level > Pr. 06-30 (default=50%) Action time Immediately act Error treatment: Pr.
  • Page 641 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Motor over-heating warning. Motor over-heating 22_2 The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside the (oH3) PT100 motor is too high. Action and Reset Action level Pr. 03-00=11 (PT100), PT100 input level > Pr. 06-57 (default=7V) Action time Immediately act Error treatment: Pr.
  • Page 642 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Over slip warning. By using the maximum slip (Pr. 10-29) as the base, Over slip warning when the drive outputs at constant speed, and the F>H (oSL) or F<H exceeds Pr.
  • Page 643 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Output phase loss Output phase loss (OPHL) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-47 Action time Pr. 06-45 0: Warn and keep operating Warning setting parameter 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2: Warn and coast to stop 3: No warning If Pr.
  • Page 644 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CANopen guarding CANopen guarding time-out 1 time-out (CGdn) Action and Reset When CANopen Node Guarding detects that one of the slaves does not Action level response, the CGdn error displays. The upper unit sets factor and time during configuration.
  • Page 645 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CANopen bus off error CANopen BUS off error (CbFn) Action and Reset Hardware When CANopen card is not installed, CbFn fault will occur. When the master received wrong communication package, CbFn fault will occur.
  • Page 646 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CANopen station CANopen station address error (only supports 1–127) address error (CAdn) Action and Reset Action level CANopen station address error Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual Reset...
  • Page 647 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CANopen SDO SDO transmission time-out (only shows on master time-out (CSdn) station) Action and Reset When the CANopen master transmits SDO command, and the Slave response Action level “time-out”, CSdn warning will occur.
  • Page 648 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CANopen format error CANopen protocol format error (CPtn) Action and Reset The slave detects that data from the upper unit cannot be recognized, and then Action level shows CPtn warning Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected...
  • Page 649 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description InnerCOM error InnerCOM error (PLiC) Action and Reset Action level Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Reset condition When InnerCOM is back to normal condition, the warning automatically clears Record Cause Corrective Actions...
  • Page 650 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description PLC opposite defect PLC download error warning (PLod) Action and Reset During PLC downloading, the program source code detects incorrect address Action level (e.g. the address exceeds the range), then the PLod warning shows. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
  • Page 651 Check if the program is correct and re-download the program. If the fault does Reset method not exist, the warning automatically clears. Reset condition Record Cause Corrective Actions Unsupported command has used Check if the firmware of the drive is the old version. If yes, please contact Delta. while downloading the program 13-24...
  • Page 652 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description PLC buffer overflow PLC register overflow (PLor) Action and Reset When PLC runs the last command and the command exceeds the maximum Action level capacity of the program, the PLor warning shows. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
  • Page 653 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Checksum error PLC checksum error (PLSn) Action and Reset Action level PLC checksum error is detected after power on, then PLSn warning shows Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter Check if the program is correct and re-download the program.
  • Page 654 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description PLC MCR error PLC MCR command error (PLCr) Action and Reset The MC command is detected during PLC operation, but there is no Action level corresponded MCR command, then the PLCr warning shows. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
  • Page 655 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description PLC scan time fail PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable time (PLSF) Action and Reset When the PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable time (400ms), PLSF Action level warning shows.
  • Page 656 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CAN/M BUS off CANopen Master BUS off (PCbF) Action and Reset When the CANopen master detects error packets more than 255 during the BUS off detection, or when the CANopen card is not installed, the PCbF warning Action level displays.
  • Page 657 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CAN/M cycle time-out CANopen Master cycle time-out (PCCt) Action and Reset When the transmitted packet from CANopen master exceeds the maximum Action level allowable quantity in a certain time, the PCCt warning displays. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
  • Page 658 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description CAN/M SDO time-out CANopen Master SDO time-out (PCSd) Action and Reset When the CANopen master sends a SDO command, and the BUS is too busy to Action level transmit the command, PCSd warning displays.
  • Page 659 2. Make sure the communication circuit is wired in series. 3. Use CANopen cable or add terminating resistance. The command from the upper unit does not meet the CANopen Please contact Delta for further confirmation. format ID No. Display on LCM Keypad...
  • Page 660 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description ExCom power loss Low voltage of communication card (ECLv) Action and Reset Action level The 5V power that drive provides to communication card is to low Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method...
  • Page 661 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description ExCom no power There is no power supply on the DeviceNet (ECnP) Action and Reset Action level There is no power supply on the DeviceNet Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method...
  • Page 662 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description ExCom IO Net break IO connection break off (ECio) Action and Reset Action level IO connection between the communication card and the master is broken off Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method...
  • Page 663 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Ethernet link fail Ethernet cable is not connected (ECEF) Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Record Cause...
  • Page 664 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Return defect Communication card returns to the default setting (ECrF) Action and Reset Action level Communication card returns to the default setting Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
  • Page 665 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description EtherNet/IP over Ethernet/IP exceeds maximum communication value (ECo1) Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately resets Record Cause...
  • Page 666 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Mail warning: Alarm mail will be sent when the Mail fail (EC3F) communication card establishes alarm conditions Action and Reset Action level Communication card establishes alarm conditions Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter...
  • Page 667 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Copy PLC password error. Copy PLC: password When KPC-CC01 is processing PLC copy and the PLC error (CPLP) password is incorrect, the CPLP warning shows. Action and Reset Action level PLC password is incorrect Action time...
  • Page 668 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Copy PLC version error. Copy PLC: version When non-C2000 built-in PLC is copied to C2000 drive, error (CPLv) the CPLv warning shows Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately acts...
  • Page 669 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Copy PLC: time-out Copy PLC time out (CPLt) Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Directly resets Record Cause...
  • Page 670 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description Estimated speed Estimated speed is in a reverse direction with motor reverse (SpdR) actual running direction Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Pr. 10-09 Pr.
  • Page 671 Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 [This page intentionally left blank] 13-44...

  • Page 672: Chapter 14 Fault Codes And Descriptions

    Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions * : Refer to setting of Pr. 06-17–Pr. 06-22. Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Output current exceeds 2.4 times of rated current during Over-current during acceleration.
  • Page 673 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 The ocA occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive. Check for possible short circuits between terminals with the electric meter: Hardware failure B1 corresponds to U, V, W; DC- corresponds to U, V, W; corresponds to U, V, W.
  • Page 674 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Output current exceeds 2.4 times of rated current during Over-current during deceleration. deceleration When ocd occurs, the drive closes the gate of the (ocd) output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the display shows an ocd error.
  • Page 675 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Output current exceeds 2.4 times of the rated current Over-current during during constant speed. steady operation When ocn occurs, the drive closes the gate of the output (ocn) immediately, the motor runs freely, and the display shows an ocn error.
  • Page 676 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit current is larger than Pr. 06-60 setting value, and the detection time is longer than Pr. 06-61 time setting, Ground fault (GFF) GFF occurs.
  • Page 677 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Over-current or hardware failure in current detection at Over-current at stop stop. (ocS) Cycle the power after ocS occurs. If the hardware failure occurs, the display shows cd1, cd2 or cd3. Action and Reset Action level 240% of rated current...
  • Page 678 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions DC BUS over-voltage during deceleration. Over-voltage during When ovd occurs, the drive closes the gate of the deceleration output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the (ovd) display shows an ovd error.
  • Page 679 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions DC BUS over-voltage at constant speed. Over-voltage at When ovn occurs, the drive closes the gate of the constant speed output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the (ovn) display shows an ovn error.
  • Page 680 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Over-voltage at stop Over-voltage at stop (ovS) Action and Reset 230V series: 410V 460V series: 820V Action level 575V series: 1116V 690V series: 1318V Action time Immediately act when DC BUS voltage is higher than the level Fault treatment parameter Reset method...
  • Page 681 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Low-voltage during DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00 setting value deceleration during deceleration (Lvd) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-00 (Default = depending on the model) Action time Immediately act when DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr.
  • Page 682 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions 1. DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00 setting Low-voltage at stop value at stop (LvS) 2. Hardware failure in voltage detection Action and Reset Action level Pr.
  • Page 683 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions IGBT overheating IGBT temperature exceeds the protection level (oH1) Action and Reset When Pr.06-15 is higher than the IGBT overheating protection level, oH1 error Action level occurs instead of oH1 warning.
  • Page 684 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Heatsink overheating Capacitance temperature exceeds the protection level (oH2) Action and Reset Action level Refer to the table below for oH2 level of each models When capacitance temperature exceeds the protection level for more than Action time 100ms, oH2 error occurs Fault treatment parameter...
  • Page 685 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 oH warning Model oH1 warning = (Pr.06-15) VFD150C43A/E VFD185C43A/E VFD220C43A/E VFD300C43A/E VFD370C43S/U VFD450C43S/U VFD550C43A/E VFD750C43A/E VFD900C43A/E oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5 oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5 VFD1100C43A/E VFD1320C43A/E VFD1600C43A/E VFD1850C43A/E VFD2200C43A/E VFD2800C43A/E VFD3150C43A/E VFD3550C43A/E VFD4500C43A/E...
  • Page 686 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions IGBT temperature detection failure IGBT hardware failure in temperature detection (tH1o) Action and Reset Action level NTC broken or wiring failure When the IGBT temperature is higher than the protection level, and detection Action time time exceeds 100ms, the tH1o protection activates.
  • Page 687 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current. The overload capacity sustains for 1 minute Over load (oL) when the drive outputs 120% of the drive’s rated output current.
  • Page 688 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Electronics thermal Electronics thermal relay 1 protection. The drive coasts relay 1 protection to stop once it activates. (EoL1) Action and Reset Action level Start counting when output current > 105% of motor 1 rated current Pr.
  • Page 689 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Electronic thermal Electronic thermal relay 2 protection. The drive coasts relay 2 protection to stop once it activates. (EoL2) Action and Reset Action level Start counting when output current > 105% of motor 2 rated current Pr.
  • Page 690 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Motor overheating (PTC) (Pr. 03-00 – Pr. 03-02=6 Motor overheating 24_1 PTC), when PTC input > Pr. 06-30, the fault treatment (oH3) PTC acts according to Pr. 06-29. Action and Reset Action level PTC input value >...
  • Page 691 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Motor overheating (PT100) (Pr. 03-00 – Pr. 03-02=11 Motor overheating 24_2 PT100). When PT100 input > Pr. 06-57 (default = 7V), (oH3) PT100 the fault treatment acts according to Pr. 06-29. Action and Reset Action level PT100 input value >...
  • Page 692 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions When output current exceeds the over-torque detection Over torque 1 level (Pr.06-07) and exceeds over-torque detection time (ot1) (Pr.06-08), and when Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09 is set to 2 or 4, the ot1 error displays.
  • Page 693 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions When output current exceeds the over-torque detection Over torque 2 level (Pr.06-10) and exceeds over-torque detection time (ot2) (Pr.06-11), and when Pr.06-09 is set to 2 or 4, the ot2 error displays.
  • Page 694 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Under current Low current detection (uC) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-71 Action time Pr. 06-72 Pr. 06-73 0: No function Fault treatment parameter 1: warn and coast to stop 2: warn and ramp to stop by 2 deceleration time 3: warn and operation continue...
  • Page 695 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions EEPROM write error Internal EEPROM cannot be programmed (cF1) Action and Reset Action level Firmware internal detection Action time cF1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset...
  • Page 696 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions V-phase error (cd2) V-phase current detection error when power ON Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time cd2 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault Fault treatment parameter Reset method Power-off...
  • Page 697 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Oc hardware error oc hardware protection error when power is ON (Hd1) Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time Hd1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault Fault treatment parameter Reset method Power-off...
  • Page 698 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Auto-tuning error Motor auto-tuning error (AUE) Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record Cause...
  • Page 699 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions PG feedback error The motor runs in a reverse direction to the frequency (PGF1) command direction. Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Pr. 10-09 Pr.
  • Page 700 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Under PG mode, when the motor frequency exceeds the encoder observer stall level (Pr. 10-10) and starts to PG feedback stall count, the fault time is longer than the detection time of (GF3) encoder observer stall (Pr.
  • Page 701 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions ACI loss Analog input loss (including all the 4–20mA analog (ACE) signal) Action and Reset Action level When the analog input is < 4mA (only detects 4–20mA analog input) Action time Immediately act Pr.
  • Page 702 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions When the contact of MIx=EF1 is ON, the output stops Emergency stop immediately and displays EF1 on the keypad. The (EF1) motor is in free running. Action and Reset Action level MIx=EF1 and the MI terminal is ON...
  • Page 703 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Illegal command Communication command is illegal (CE1) Action and Reset Action level When the function code is not 03, 06, 10, or 63. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset...
  • Page 704 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Illegal data value Data value is illegal (CE3) Action and Reset Action level When the data length is too long Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
  • Page 705 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions MODBUS transmission time-out MODBUS transmission time-out occurs (CE10) Action and Reset Action level When the communication time exceeds the detection time for Pr.09-03 time-out. Action time Pr.
  • Page 706 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Y-connection / Δ-connection An error occurs when Δ switches switch error (ydc) Action and Reset 1. ydc occurs when the confirmation signals of Y-connection and Δ-connection Action level are conducted at the same time.
  • Page 707 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions On the basis of the maximum slip limit set via Pr. 10-29, the speed deviation is abnormal. When the motor drive outputs at constant speed, F>H or F<H exceeds the Over slip error (oSL) level set via Pr.
  • Page 708 Choose the correct setting of Pr. 10-00 is incorrect If the motor selection switch of PG Check if it is the UVW encoder or Delta encoder card on the correct position PG card selection is incorrect Install the correct PG card...
  • Page 709 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Over speed rotation Over speed rotation detected by sensorless feedback (SdOr) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 10-10 Action time Pr. 10-11 Pr. 10-12 0: Warn and keep operation Fault treatment parameter 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2: Warn and coast to stop...
  • Page 710 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Large deviation of A large deviation between the rotating speed and the speed feedback command detected by the sensorless (SdDe) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 10-13 Action time Pr.
  • Page 711 Check if the IO card connects to the control board correctly, and if the screws are tightened well? The IO card does not match the Contact local agent or Delta version of the control board Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name...
  • Page 712 Poor connection of the IO card Check if the IO card connects to the control board correctly, and if the screws are tightened well? The IO card does not match the Contact local agent or Delta version of the control board 14-41...
  • Page 713 Check if the IO card connects to the control board correctly, and if the screws are tightened well? The IO card does not match the Contact local agent or Delta version of the control board Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal loop detection...
  • Page 714 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Output phase loss U phase output phase loss U phase (OPHL) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-47 Pr. 06-46 Action time Pr. 06-48: Use the setting value of Pr. 06-48 first if there is DC braking function, and then use that of Pr.
  • Page 715 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Output phase loss V phase output phase loss V phase (OPHL) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-47 Pr. 06-46 Action time Pr. 06-48: Use the setting value of Pr. 06-48 first. If DC braking function activates, use that of Pr.
  • Page 716 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Output phase loss W phase output phase loss W phase (OPHL) Action and Reset Action level Pr. 06-47 Pr. 06-46 Action time Pr. 06-48: Use the setting value of Pr. 06-48 first. If DC braking function activates, use that of Pr.
  • Page 717 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions PG ABZ line off The ABZ line off for protection when using PG02U (AboF) Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
  • Page 718 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions PG UVW line off UVW line off for protection when using PG02U (UvoF) Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
  • Page 719 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Rotor position detection error Rotor position detection error protection (RoPd) Action and Reset Action level Reset the software Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset...
  • Page 720 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions CPU error 0 (TRAP) CPU crash Action and Reset Action level Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Cannot reset, power off. Reset condition Record Cause...
  • Page 721 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions CANopen heartbeat CANopen heartbeat error error (CHbE) Action and Reset When CANopen Heartbeat detects that one of the slaves does not response, the CHbE fault will activate. Action level The upper unit sets the confirming time of producer and consumer during configuration.
  • Page 722 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions CANopen bus off error CANopen bus off error (CbFE) Action and Reset Hardware When CANopen card is not installed, CbFE fault will occur. When the master received wrong communication package, CbFE fault will occur.
  • Page 723 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions CANopen station CANopen station address error (only supports 1 – 127) address error (CAdE) Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset (Pr.
  • Page 724 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions InrCOM time-out error Internal communication time-out (ictE) Action and Reset Pr. 09-31=-1 – -10 (there is no -9), when the internal communication between Action level Slave and Master is abnormal, IctE fault will occur. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter...
  • Page 725 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions Auto-tune error 1 No feedback current error when motor parameter (AUE1) automatically detects Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
  • Page 726 Acts when turning on the drive Fault treatment parameter Reset method Cannot reset Reset condition Cannot reset Record Cause Corrective Actions Replace with the correct control board. If the CBM still exists, contact Delta for Incorrect control board further confirmation. 14-55...
  • Page 727 Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000 [This page intentionally left blank] 14-56...

  • Page 728: Chapter 15 Canopen Overview

    Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview 15-1 CANopen Overview 15-2 Wiring for CANopen 15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description 15-4 CANopen Supporting Index 15-5 CANopen Fault Code 15-6 CANopen LED Function 15-1...
  • Page 729 Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02; Support SYNC service; Support Emergency service.  NMT (Network Management): Support NMT module control; Support NMT Error control; Support Boot-up. Delta CANopen not supporting service: Time Stamp service  15-2...

  • Page 730: Canopen Overview

    Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 15-1 CANopen Overview CANopen Protocol CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine control networks such as handling systems. Version 4.02 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover the application layer and communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA DS302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA DS303-1), SI units, and prefix representations (CiA DS303-2).
  • Page 731 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen Communication Protocol It has services as follows: NMT (Network Management Object)  SDO (Service Data Objects)  PDO (Process Data Object)  EMCY (Emergency Object)  NMT (Network Management Object) The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. A network has only one NMT master, and the other nodes are slaves.
  • Page 732 Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving SYNC. Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR. Type number 254: Delta CANopen does not support this transmission format. Type number 255 indicates the data is an asynchronous aperiodic transmission.

  • Page 733: Wiring For Canopen

    Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 15-2 Wiring for CANopen Use an external adapter card EMC-COP01 for CANopen wiring to connect CANopen to a C2000. The link uses a RJ45 cable. You must terminate the two farthest ends with 120 Ω terminating resistors as shown in the picture below.

  • Page 734: Canopen Communication Interface Description

    Delta’s standard setting (Pr. 09-40 set to 0). There are two control modes according to Delta’s standard. One is the old control mode (Pr. 09-30 = 0); this control mode can only control the motor drive under frequency control. The other mode is a new standard (Pr. 09-30 = 1); this new control mode allows the motor drive to be controlled under multiple modes.
  • Page 735 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 15-3-2 DS402 Standard Control Mode 15-3-2-1 Related set up for an AC motor drive (following the DS402 standard) If you want to use the DS402 standard to control the motor drive, follow these steps: Wire the hardware (refer to Section 15-2 Wiring for CANopen) Set the operation source: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
  • Page 736 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 When the motor drive turns on and finishes the initiation, it remains in Ready to Switch On status. To control the operation of the motor drive, change to Operation Enable status. To do this, set the control word’s bit0–bit3 and bit7 of the Index 6040H and pair with Index Status Word (Status Word 0X6041).
  • Page 737 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Index Sub Definition Default Size Unit Mode note 0: Disable drive function 1: Slow down on slow down ramp 2: Slow down on quick stop ramp 5: Slow down on slow down ramp Quick stop 605Ah and stay in QUICK STOP option code...
  • Page 738 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 NOTE 01: Read 6043 to get the current rotation speed. (Unit: rpm) NOTE 02: Read bit 10 of 6041 to find if the rotation speed has reached the targeting value. (0: Not reached; 1: Reached) Torque mode 1.
  • Page 739 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 NOTE: The standard DS402 does not regulate the maximum speed limit. Therefore, if the motor drive defines the control mode of DS402, the highest speed will go with the setting of Pr. 11-36 to Pr. 11-38. NOTE 01: Read 6077 to get the current torque.
  • Page 740 Set the frequency source: set Pr. 00-20 to 6. Choose source for the Frequency Commend from the CANopen setting. Set Delta Standard (Old definition, only supports speed mode) as the control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and Pr. 09-30 = 0.
  • Page 741 Set the position source: set Pr.11-40=3. Choose the source of the Position Command from CANopen setting.) Set Delta Standard (New definition) as the control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and Pr. 09-30 = 0. Set the CANopen station: set Pr. 09-36; the range is among 1–127. When Pr. 09-36=0, the CANopen slave function is disabled.
  • Page 742 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Torque Mode 1. Set C2000 to torque control mode: set Index 6060 = 4. 2. Set the target torque: set 2060-07, unit as %, and the value is one decimal place. For example, 100 is 10.0%. 3.
  • Page 743 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 NOTE01: Read 2061-05 to get the current position. NOTE02: Read bit0 of 2061 to find if the position has reached to the target position. (0: Not reached, 1: Reached). Home Mode 1. Set Pr. 00-12 to choose the method to return home. 2.
  • Page 744 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 15-3-5 DI/DO AI/AO are controlled through CANopen To control the DO/AO of the motor drive through CANopen, follow the steps below: 1. Define the DO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr. 02-14 to control RY2. 2.
  • Page 745 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 DO： Terminal Related Parameters Mapping Index Pr. 02-13 = 50 2026-41 bit0 Pr. 02-14 = 50 2026-41 bit1 Pr. 02-16 = 50 2026-41 bit3 Pr. 02-17 = 50 2026-41 bit4 MO10 2026-41 bit5 Pr. 02-36 = 50 RY10 2026-41 bit5 MO11...

  • Page 746: Canopen Supporting Index

    Pr. 10-15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment) Group member 10(0AH) 15(0FH) Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H C2000 Control Index: Delta Standard Mode (Old Definition) Index Sub Definition Default Size Note 0 Number bit1–0...
  • Page 747 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Index Sub Definition Default Size Note bit0 E.F. ON bit1 Reset 3 Other trigger bit2 1: Base Block (B.B) ON bit15–3 Reserved 2021H 0 Number High byte: Warn code 1 Error code Low byte: Error code bit1–0 stop decelerate to stop...
  • Page 748 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Index Sub Definition Default Size Note Display actual output frequency (XXX.XXHz) Display DC-BUS voltage (XXX.XV) Display output voltage (XXX.XV) Display output power angle (XX.X°) 7 Display output power in kW Display actual motor speed (rpm) Display estimate output torque (XXX.X%) A Display PG feedback...
  • Page 749 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Index Sub Definition Default Size Note Display DC BUS voltage ripples (Unit: V Display PLC register D1043 data Display Pole of Permanent Magnet Motor User page displays the value in physical measure 20 Output Value of Pr.00-05 Number of motor turns when drive operates 22 Operation position of motor...
  • Page 750 MO1 MO2 MO10 MO11 RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15 1: Control broad I/O (Standard) 2: Add external card, EMC-D42A 3: Add external card, EMC-R6AA Delta Standard Mode (New definition) Descriptions Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode...
  • Page 751 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Descriptions Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode bit DefinitionPriority 06h RW Torque 07h RW U16 command (signed decimal) Speed limit 08h RW U16 (unsigned decimal) Arrive Frequency attained Position attained Homing complete Torque attained 0: Motor FWD 0: Motor FWD 0: Motor FWD...
  • Page 752 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Unit Mode Note 6: Homing Mode 6061h 0 Mode of operation display Same as above 6064h 0 pp Position actual value RO S32 6071h 0 tq Target torque RW S16 0.1% Yes Valid unit: 1% 6072h 0 tq Max torque...

  • Page 753: Canopen Fault Codes

    Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 15-5 CANopen Fault Code *: Refer to setting value of Pr.06-17–Pr. 06-22 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) 0001H Over-current during acceleration 2213 H 0002H Over-current during deceleration 2213 H 0003H Over-current during steady operation...
  • Page 754 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) DC BUS over-voltage at constant 0009H 3210H speed Over-voltage at stop. Hardware 000AH 3210H failure in voltage detection DCBUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 000BH 3220H during acceleration.
  • Page 755 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) Overload; the AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current. 0015H 2310H NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150% of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds.
  • Page 756 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) 0022H V-phase current error FF05H 0023H W-phase current error FF06H 0024H cc (current clamp) hardware error FF07H 0025H oc hardware error FF08H 0026H ov hardware error FF09H...
  • Page 757 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) 002DH PG slip error 7301H 0030H ACI loss (ACE) FF25H External Fault; when the multi-function input terminal (EF) is 0031H 9000H active, the AC motor drive stops output.
  • Page 758 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) 003AH Modbus transmission time-out. 7500H 003CH Brake resistor error 7110H Y-connection / Δ-connection switch 003DH 3330H error Energy regeneration when 003EH FF27H decelerating Motor slip exceeds Pr.
  • Page 759 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) 0049H Emergency stop for external safety FF2AH 004BH External brake error 7110H 004CH Safe Torque Off function active 5440H STO2–SCM2 internal loop detection 004DH 5442H error...
  • Page 760 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 CANopen CANopen Display Fault code Description fault register No.* fault code (bit 0–7) 005AH Force to stop FF2EH 0065H CANopen guarding error 8130H 0066H CANopen heartbeat error 8130H 0068H CANopen bus off error 8140H 0069H CANopen index error 8100H 006AH...

  • Page 761: Canopen Led Function

    Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 15-6 CANopen LED Function There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR. RUN LED: LED status Condition CANopen State Initial Blinking Pre-Operation 1000 Single flash Stopped 單次閃爍 Operation ERR LED: LED status Condition / Status No Error One Message failure Single...

  • Page 762: Chapter 16 Plc Function Applications

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Chapter 16 PLC Function Applications 16-1 PLC Summary 16-2 Notes before PLC use 16-3 Turn on 16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams 16-5 Various PLC device functions 16-6 Introduction to the Command Window 16-7 Error display and handling 16-8 CANopen Master control applications...

  • Page 763: Plc Summary

    Delta's PLC DVP series. 16-1-2 WPLSoft ladder diagram editing tool WPLSoft is Delta's program editing software for the DVP and C2000 programmable controllers in the Windows operating system environment. Apart from general PLC program design general Windows editing functions (such as cut, paste, copy, multiple windows, etc.), WPLSoft also provides many...

  • Page 764: Notes Before Plc Use

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-2 Notes before PLC use The PLC has a preset communications format of 7, N, 2, 9600, with node 2; the PLC node can be changed in Pr. 09-35, but this address may not be the same as the drive's address setting of Pr.
  • Page 765 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 H 0.00Hz Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 A 0.00Hz Can display 0–65535 C _ _ _ _ _ In the PLC Run and PLC Stop mode, the content 9 and 10 of Pr. 00-02 cannot be set and cannot be reset to the default value.

  • Page 766: Turn On

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-3 Turn on 16-3-1 Connect to PC Start operation of PLC functions in accordance with the following four steps After pressing the Menu key and selecting 4: PLC on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad, press the Enter key (see figure below). Wiring: Connect the drive's RJ45 communications interface to a PC via the RS-485.
  • Page 767 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 PLC mode PLC Mode select bit1(52) PLC Mode select bit0 (51) Using KPC-CC01 Disable PLC Run PLC Stop Maintain previous state NOTE  When input/ output terminals (FWD REV MI1–MI8, MI10–15, Relay1, Relay2, RY10–RY15, MO1–MO2, and MO10–MO11) are included in the PLC program, these input/ output terminals will only be used by the PLC.
  • Page 768 2: Expansion card: EMC-D42A (D1022=5) 3: Expansion card: EMC-R6AA (D1022=6) 16-3-3 Installation WPLSoft Download and install WPLSoft editing software in Delta’s website: After completing installation, the WPLSoft program will be installed in the designated subfolder “C: \Program Files\Delta Industrial Automation\WPLSoft x.xx”.
  • Page 769 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 2: The WPLSoft editing window appears (see figure 16-2 below). When running WPLSoft for the first time, before "New file" has been used, only the "File (F)," "Communications (C)," View (V)," "Options (O)," and "Help (H)" columns will appear on the function toolbar. Figure 16-2 After running WPLSoft for the second time, the last file edited will open and be displayed NOTE...
  • Page 770 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 3: Click on the icon on the toolbar: opens new file (Ctrl+N), see figure 16-4 below Figure 16-4 You can also find “New file (N) (Ctrl+N)” in the "File (F)", as shown in figure 16-5 below. NOTE Figure 16-5 Step 4: The "Device settings"...
  • Page 771 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 5: Press Confirm after completing settings and begin program editing. There are two program editing methods; you can choose whether to perform editing in the command mode or the ladder diagram mode (see figure 16-8 below). Figure 16-8 In ladder diagram mode, you can perform program editing using the buttons on the function NOTE...
  • Page 772 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Basic Operation-Example Input the ladder diagram as the figure below. The following steps can be operated through the mouse or function key (F1–F12) on the keyboard. Figure 16-10 Step 1: The following screen will appear after a new file is established: Figure 16-11 Step 2: Click on the always-open switch icon or press the function key F1.
  • Page 773 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Figure 16-13 Step 3: Click on the output coil icon or press function key F7. After the name of the input device and the comment dialog box have appeared, the device name (such as "Y"), device number (such as "0"), and input comments (such as "output coil") can be selected;...
  • Page 774 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 4: Press “ENTER” button, when the “Input Instructions” window appears, key in “END” in the field and press the OK button (see figure 16-16 and 16-17 below). Figure 16-16 Figure 16-17 Step 5: Click on the “Ladder diagram =>...
  • Page 775 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-3-5 Program download After inputting a program using WPLSoft, select compile . After completing compilation, select to download a program. WPLSoft will perform program download with the online PLC in the communications format specified in communications settings. 16-3-6 Program monitoring While confirming that the PLC is in the Run mode, after downloading a program, click on in the...

  • Page 776: Basic Principles Of Plc Ladder Diagrams

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams 16-4-1 Schematic diagram of PLC ladder diagram program scanning Output results are calculated on the basis of the ladder diagram configuration Repeated (internal devices will have implementation real-time output before results are sent to an external output point) 16-4-2 Introduction to ladder diagrams...
  • Page 777 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 The various internal devices in a PLC all account for a certain quantity of storage units in the PLC's storage area. When these devices are used, the content of the corresponding storage area is read in the form of bits, bytes, or words. Introduction to the basic internal devices in a PLC Device type Description of Function...
  • Page 778 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Device type Description of Function When a PLC is used to perform various types of sequence control and set time value and count value control, it most commonly perform data processing and numerical operations, and data registers are used exclusively for storage of data and various parameters.
  • Page 779 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Ladder diagram Explanation of commands Command Using Device structures Some basic Some basic commands, commands applications commands Applications commands Inverted logic 16-4-3 Overview of PLC ladder diagram editing The program editing method begins from the left busbar and proceeds to the right busbar (the right busbar is omitted when editing using WPLSoft).
  • Page 780 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Explanation of basic structure of ladder diagrams LD (LDI) command: An LD or LDI command is given at the start of a block. LDP and LDF have this command structure, but there are differences in their action state. LDP, LDF only act at the rising or falling edge of a conducting contact.
  • Page 781 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 ORB command: A configuration in which one block is in parallel with one device or block. In the case of ANB and ORB operations, if a number of blocks are connected, they should be combined to form a block or network from the top down or from left to right. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Branching point memory for multiple outputs, enabling multiple, different outputs.
  • Page 782 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-4-4 Commonly used basic program design examples Start, stop, and protection Some applications may require a brief close or brief break using the buttons to start and stop equipment. A protective circuit must therefore be designed to maintain continued operation in these situations;...
  • Page 783 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Commonly used control circuits Example 4: Conditional control X1, X3 are respectively start/ stop Y1, and X2 & X4 are respectively start/ stop Y2; all have protective circuits. Because Y1's NO contact is in series with Y2's circuit, it becomes an AND condition for the actuation of Y2.
  • Page 784 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Example 6: Sequence control If the NC contact of Y2 in the interlocking control configuration of example 5 is put in series with the Y1 circuit, so that it is an AND condition for actuation of Y1 (see figure below), not only is Y1 a condition for the actuation of Y2 in this circuit, the actuation of Y2 will also stop the actuation of Y1.
  • Page 785 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Example 8: Flashing circuit The following figure shows an oscillating circuit of a type commonly used to cause an indicator light to flash or a buzzer to buzz. It uses two timers to control the On and Off time of Y1 coil.
  • Page 786 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Example 11: The open/ close delay circuit is composed of two timers; output Y4 will have a delay whether input X0 is On or Off. Example 12: Extended timing circuit In the circuit in the figure on the left, the total delay time from the moment input X0 closes to the time output Y1 is electrified is (n1+n2)*T, where T is the clock cycle.

  • Page 787: Various Plc Device Functions

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-5 Various PLC device functions Item Specifications Notes Algorithmic control Program stored internally, alternating method back-and-forth scanning method When it starts again after ending (after execution to Input/ output control the END command), the input/ output has an method immediate refresh command Algorithmic...
  • Page 788 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-5-1 Introduction to device functions Input/ output contact functions Input contact X functions: Input contact X is connected with an input device, and reads input signals entering the PLC. The number of times that contact a or b of input contact X is used in the program is not subject to restrictions.
  • Page 789 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Octal Number, OCT The external input and output terminals of a DVP-PLC are numbered using octal numbers Example: External input: X0–X7，X10–X17…(Device number table); External output: Y0–Y7，Y10–Y17…(Device number table) Decimal Number, DEC Decimal numbers are used for the following purposes in a PLC system: The setting values of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50.
  • Page 790 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Functions of auxiliary relays Like an output relay Y, an auxiliary relay M has an output coil and contacts a and b, and the number of times they can be used in a program is unrestricted. Users can use an auxiliary relay M to configure the control circuit, but cannot use it to directly drive an external load.
  • Page 791 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Example RST C0 C0 K5 1. When X0=On and the RST command is executed, the current value of C0 will revert to 0, and the output contact will revert to Off. 2. When X1 changes from Off→On, the current value of the counter will execute an increase (add one).
  • Page 792 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Special Description of Function R/W * M1019 -- M1020 Zero flag M1021 Borrow flag M1022 Carry flag M1023 Divisor is 0 M1024 -- Target drive frequency = set frequency (ON) M1025 Target drive frequency =0 (OFF) M1026 Drive operating direction FWD(OFF) / REV(ON) M1027 Drive Reset M1028 --...
  • Page 793 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Special Description of Function R/W * M1072 – M1075 M1076 Calendar time error or refresh time out M1077 485 Read/write complete M1078 485 Read-write error M1079 485 Communications time out M1090 AUTO M1091 OFF M1092 HAND M1100 LOCAL M1101 REMOTE M1168 SBOV BCD and BIN mode switch...
  • Page 794 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Special D Description of Function R/W * calculation frequency command (frequency command after D1027 PID calculation) D1028 AVI value (0.00–100.00%) D1029 ACI value (0.0–100.00%) D1030 AUI value (-100.0–100.00%) D1031 C series: extension card AI10 (0.0–100.0%) D1032 C series: extension card AI11 (0.0–100.0%) D1033...
  • Page 795 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Special D Description of Function R/W * D1105 Target torque D1106 D1107 π(Pi) Low word D1108 π(Pi) High word D1109 Random number Internal node communications number (set number of slave stations to be D1110 controlled) D1111 Actual position (Low word) D1112...
  • Page 796 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Special D Description of Function R/W * D1158 Internal node 3 reference status H D1159 D1160 Internal node 4 control command D1161 Internal node 4 mode D1162 Internal node 4 reference command L D1163 Internal node 4 reference command H D1164 D1165 D1166...
  • Page 797 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Special Description of Function Default R/W * PID 1 Feedback selection: 0: Refer to D1204 D1203 1: AVI 2: ACI 3: AUI D1204 PID 1 Feedback value (0.00%–100.00%) D1205 PID 1 P value (decimal 2 points) D1206 PID 1 I value (decimal 2 points) 1000 D1207 PID 1 D value (decimal 2 points)
  • Page 798 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 The following is CANopen Master's special D (Allow writing only when PLC is in STOP state) n = 0–7 Power Special D Description of Function Default Memory Channel opened by CANopen initialization D1070 (bit0=Machine code0 …) Error channel occurring in CANopen initialization D1071 process (bit0=Machine code0 …)
  • Page 799 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 The C2000 supports 8 slave stations under the CANopen protocol; each slave station occupies 100 special D locations; stations are numbered 1–8, total of 8 stations. Slave station no. 1 D2000 Node ID Explanation of D2001 Slave station no.
  • Page 800 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Torque control Slave station number n=0–7 PDO Default: Special D Description of Function Default: Index 1 2 3 D2017+100*n Target torque of slave station number n 6071H–0010H ● ▲ D2018+100*n Actual torque of slave station number n 6077H–0010H D2019+100*n Actual current of slave station number n...
  • Page 801 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command code that can be used Function Code Description of Function Function target Coil status read Y,M,T,C Input status read X,Y,M,T,C Read single unit of data T,C,D Compulsory single coil status change Y,M,T,C Write single unit of data T,C,D Compulsory multiple coil status change Y,M,T,C...

  • Page 802: Introduction To The Command Window

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-6 Introduction to the Command Window 16-6-1 Overview of basic commands Ordinary commands Command Execution Function OPERAND code speed (us) Load contact a X, Y, M, T, C Load contact b X, Y, M, T, C Connect contact a in series X, Y, M, T, C Connect contact b in series...
  • Page 803 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Stop command Command Execution Function OPERAND code speed (us) Program conclusion Other commands Command Execution Function OPERAND code speed (us) No action Inverse of operation results Index 16-6-2 Detailed explanation of basic commands Command Function Load contact a X0–X17 Y0–Y17...
  • Page 804 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Function Connect contact b in series X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand      － The ANI command is used to create a series connection to contact b; its function is to first read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results before contact in order to perform "AND"...
  • Page 805 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Function Parallel circuit block Operand ORB performs an "OR" operation on the previously saved logic results and the current cumulative register content. Ladder diagram: Command code: Description: Block A Load Contact a of X0 Establish parallel connection to contact b of X1...
  • Page 806 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Function Drive coil X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand   － － － － Outputs result of logical operation before OUT command to the designated element. Coil contact action: Out command Result: Access Point: Coil Contact a (NO)
  • Page 807 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Function 16-bit timer T0–T159, K0–K32,767 Operand T0–T159, D0–D399 When the TMR command is executed, the designated timer coil will be electrified, and the timer will begin timing. The contact's action will be as follows when the timing value reaches the designated set value (timing value >= set value): NO (Normally Open) contact Closed...
  • Page 808 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Description: Ladder diagram: code: Load Contact a of X0 Connection of N0 common series contact Load Contact a of X1 Drive Y0 coil Load Contact a of X2 Connection of N1 common series contact Load Contact a of X3 Drive Y1 coil Release N1 common series contact...
  • Page 809 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Function Forward edge detection series connection ANDP X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand      － The ANDP command used for a contact rising edge detection series connection. Ladder diagram: Command code: Description: Load Contact a of X0...
  • Page 810 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Function Upper differential output X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand   － － － － Upper differential output commands. When X0=Off→On (positive edge-triggered), the PLS command will be executed, and M0 will send one pulse, with a pulse length consisting of one scanning period.
  • Page 811 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command Function No action Operand The command NOP does not perform any operation in the program. Because execution of this command will retain the original logical operation results, it can be used in the following situation: the NOP command can be used instead of a command that is deleted without changing the program length.
  • Page 812 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-6-3 Overview of application commands Command code STEPS Classification Function command 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit CALL Call subprogram  Circuit control SRET Conclusion of subprogram FEND Conclusion a main program DCMP Compares set output ...
  • Page 813 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command code STEPS Classification Function 16 bit 32 bit command 16 bit 32 bit – Binary floating point number DASIN –  ASIN operation – Binary floating point number DACOS –  ACOS operation – Binary floating point number DATAN –...
  • Page 814 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Command code STEPS Classification Function 16 bit 32 bit command 16 bit 32 bit Floating point number contact FLD＝ form compare LD* Floating point Floating point number contact FLD＞ contact form form compare LD* Floating point number contact FLD＜...
  • Page 815 Notes on operand usage: The S operand can designate P － － － － C2000 series device: The S operand can designate P0-P63 Flag signal: none S：Call subprogram pointer.  Write the subprogram after the FEND command.  The subprogram must end after the SRET command.
  • Page 816 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Conclusion a main program FEND － Bit device Word device 16-bit command (1 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM FEND － － execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: No operand － － － － A contact-driven command is not needed Flag signal: none This command indicates the end of the main program.
  • Page 817 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Compares set output Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous CMPP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (13 STEP) DCMP Continuous DCMPP Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none : Compare value 1.
  • Page 818 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Range comparison Bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) Continuous ZCPP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (17 STEP) DZCP Continuous DZCPP Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: The content value of operand S1 is less than the content value of Flag signal: none S2 operand...
  • Page 819 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Data movement Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous MOVP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: none DMOV Continuous DMOVP Pulse execution type execution type Flag signal: : Data source.
  • Page 820 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Nibble movement SMOV     Bit device Word device 16-bit command (11 STEP) Continuous SMOVP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (21 STEP) Notes on operand usage: none DSMOV Continuous DSMOV Pulse execution type execution type...
  • Page 821 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 When M1168 is On (BIN mode), and the SMOV command is executed, D10 and  D20 do not change in BCD mode, but send 4 digits as a unit in BIN mode. 16-60...
  • Page 822 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Send all BMOV Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) BMOV Continuous BMOVP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: － － － － n operand scope n ＝ 1 to 512 Flag signal: none : Initiate source device.
  • Page 823 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN to BCD transformation Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous BCDP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: none DBCD Continuous DBCDP Pulse execution type execution type Flag signal: none...
  • Page 824 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BCD to BIN transformation Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous BINP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: none DBIN Continuous DBINP Pulse execution type execution type Flag signal: none...
  • Page 825 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN addition Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous ADDP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (13 STEP) DADD Continuous DADDP Pulse Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag M1021 Borrow flag...
  • Page 826 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN subtraction Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous SUBP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (13 STEP) Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: none DSUB DSUBP execution type execution type Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag M1021 Borrow flag...
  • Page 827 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN multiplication Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous MULP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (13 STEP) DMUL Continuous DMULP Pulse Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points Flag signal: none : Multiplicand.
  • Page 828 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN division Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous DIVP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (13 STEP) DDIV Continuous DDIVP Pulse Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points Flag signal: none : Dividend.
  • Page 829 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN add one Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP) Continuous INCP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command (5 STEP) DINC Continuous DINCP Pulse execution type execution type Flag signal: none : Destination device.
  • Page 830 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN subtract one Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP) Continuous DECP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command (5 STEP) DDEC Continuous DDECP Pulse execution type execution type Flag signal: none : Destination device.
  • Page 831 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Right rotation Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous RORP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DROR Continuous DRORP Pulse execution type execution type Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY or KnM.
  • Page 832 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Left rotation Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous ROLP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DROL Continuous DROLP Pulse Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY execution type execution type or KnM.
  • Page 833 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Clear range ZRST Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) KnX KnY KnM ZRST Continuous ZRSTP Pulse execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: Number of operand D operand ≤ number of operand D －...
  • Page 834 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Decoder DECO Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) DECO Continuous DECOP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (13 STEP) DDECO Continuous DDECOP Pulse Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type Flag signal: none : Decoding source device.
  • Page 835 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Encoder ENCO Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) ENCO Continuous ENCOP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (13 STEP) DENCO Continuous DENCOP Pulse Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type Flag signal: none : Encoding source device.
  • Page 836 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 ON bit number Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous SUMP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: none DSUM Continuous DSUMP Pulse execution type execution type Flag signal: M1020 : Source device.
  • Page 837 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 ON bit judgement Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous BONP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) DBON Continuous DBONP Pulse Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type Flag signal: none : Source device.
  • Page 838 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 whole number → binary decimal transformation Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous FLTP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications DFLT Continuous DFLTP...
  • Page 839 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Comparison of binary floating point numbers ECMP Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (13 STEP) DECMP Continuous DECMP Pulse Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in...
  • Page 840 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Comparison of binary floating point number range EZCP Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (17 STEP) DEZCP Continuous DEZCP Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in...
  • Page 841 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Angle → Diameter Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) DRAD Continuous DRADP Pulse Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage Flag signal: none S: data source (angle).
  • Page 842 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Diameter → angle Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DDEG Continuous DDEGP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 843 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Adding binary floating point numbers EADD Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) DEADD Continuous DEADDP Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 844 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Subtraction of binary floating point numbers ESUB Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (13 STEP) DESUB Continuous DESUBP Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 845 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Multiplication of binary floating point numbers EMUL Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (13 STEP) DEMUL Continuous DEMULP Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 846 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Division of binary floating point numbers EDIV Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (13 STEP) DEDIV Continuous DEDIVP Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 847 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number obtain exponent Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DEXP Continuous DEXPP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 848 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number obtain logarithm Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: Continuous DLNP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 849 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number find square root ESQR Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DESQR Continuous DESQR Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 850 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number → BIN whole number transformation Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous INTP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DINT Continuous DINTP...
  • Page 851 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number SIN operation Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DSIN Continuous DSINP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series execution type execution type for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 852 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number COS operation Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DCOS Continuous DCOSP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 853 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number TAN operation Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DTAN Continuous DTANP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 854 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number ASIN operation ASIN Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DASIN Continuous DASINP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 855 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number ACOS operation ACOS Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DACOS Continuous DACOS Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 856 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number ATAN operation ATAN Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DATAN Continuous DATANP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 857 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number SINH operation SINH Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DSINH Continuous DSINHP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 858 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number COSH operation COSH Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DCOSH Continuous DCOSH Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 859 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Binary floating point number TANH operation TANH Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DTANH Continuous DTANH Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 860 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Exchange the up/down 8 bits SWAP Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP) SWAP Continuous SWAPP Pulse execution KnX KnY KnM execution type type ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command (5 STEP) DSWAP Continuous...
  • Page 861 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 MODBUS data read/write MODRW Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) MODRW Continuous MODRW Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command － － － － Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079  S1: online device address. S2: communications function code. S3: address of data to read/write.
  • Page 862 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 PLC controlling slave device MODRW command Serial Example Node Functio Addres Registe Length: n code Reads 4 sets of data comprising the PLC slave device's X0 to X3 state, and H400 saves the read data in bits 0 to 3 of D0 Reads 4 sets of data comprising the PLC slave device's Y0 to Y3 state, and H500...
  • Page 863 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Will trigger M0 On when the PLC begins to operate, and sends instruction to  execute one MODRW command. After receiving the slave device's response, if the command is correct, it will  execute one ROL command, which will cause M1 to be On. After receiving the slave device's response, will trigger M50 = 1 after a delay of 10 ...
  • Page 864 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Comparison of calendar data TCMP Bit device Word device 16-bit command (11 STEP) KnX KnY KnM TCMP Continuous TCMPP Pulse execution type execution type 32-bit command － － － － Notes on operand usage: Flag signal: none Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage : Sets the hours of the comparison time, setting range is "K0–K23."...
  • Page 865 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Comparison of calendar data TZCP Bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) KnX KnY KnM TZCP Continuous TZCPP Pulse execution type execution type 32-bit command － － － － Notes on operand usage: Flag signal: none Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage : Sets the lower limit of the comparison time.
  • Page 866 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Calendar data addition TADD Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) TADD Continuous TADDP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: － － － － Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in ...
  • Page 867 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Calendar data subtraction TSUB Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) TSUB Continuous TSUBP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: － － － － Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in ...
  • Page 868 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Calendar data read Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP) Continuous TRDP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: 32-bit command Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage －...
  • Page 869 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 BIN→GRAY code transformation Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous GRYP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DGRY Continuous DGRYP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 870 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 GRAY code →BIN transformation GBIN Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) GBIN Continuous GBINP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: DGBIN Continuous DGBINP Pulse Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type...
  • Page 871 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Contact form logical operation LD# 215– Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM － － execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DLD# Continuous － － Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type series for the range of device usage...
  • Page 872 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Contact form logical operation AND# AND# 218– Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) AND# Continuous KnX KnY KnM － － execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DAND# Continuous －...
  • Page 873 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Contact form logical operation OR# 221– Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM － － execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DOR# Continuous － － Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 874 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 LD※ Contact form compare LD* 224– Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) LD※ Continuous KnX KnY KnM － － execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: ※：=、>、<、<>、≦、≧ Continuous DLD※ － －...
  • Page 875 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 AND※ Contact form compare AND* 232– Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) AND※ Continuous KnX KnY KnM － － execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: ※：=、>、<、<>、≦、≧ Continuous DAND※ － －...
  • Page 876 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 OR※ Contact form compare OR* 240– Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) OR※ Continuous KnX KnY KnM － － execution type 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: ※：=、>、<、<>、≦、≧ Continuous DOR※ － －...
  • Page 877 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 FLD※ Floating point number contact form compare LD* 275– Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) FLD※ Continuous － － Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ execution type Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 878 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 FAND※ Floating point number contact form compare AND* 281– Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) FAND※ Continuous － － Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ execution type Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 879 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 FOR※ Floating point number contact form compare OR* 287– Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (9 STEP) FOR※ Continuous － － Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ execution type Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage...
  • Page 880 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-6-5 Detailed explanation of drive special applications commands Read servo parameter Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous RPRP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: none －...
  • Page 881 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Pr. 01-12: Acceleration time 1 Pr. 01-13: Deceleration time 1 Pr. 01-14: Acceleration time 2 Pr. 01-15: Deceleration time 2 Pr. 01-16: Acceleration time 3 Pr. 01-17: Deceleration time 3 Pr. 01-18: Acceleration time 4 Pr.
  • Page 882 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Drive PID control mode FPID Bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) FPID Continuous FPIDP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command － － － － Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal: none : PID reference target value input terminal select.
  • Page 883 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Drive speed control mode FREQ Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) FREQ Continuous FREQP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command － － － － Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal: M1015 ...
  • Page 884 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Example: When using r to write a program FREQ K2000 K1000 K1000 If we force M0 to be 1, the frequency command will be 20.00Hz; but when M0 is set as 0, there will be a different situation. Case 1: When the Pr.09-33 bit 0 is 0, and M0 is set as 0, the frequency command will remain at 20.00Hz.
  • Page 885 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Drive torque control mode TORQ Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) TORQ Continuous TORQ P Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: none － － － －...
  • Page 886 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Drive point-to-point control DPOS Bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM － － － － 32-bit command (5 STEP) DPOS Continuous DPOSP Pulse Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type Flag signal: M1064, M1070 : Target (must have a number).
  • Page 887 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Read CANopen slave station data CANRX Bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) CANRX Continuous CANRX Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command － － － － Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal : Slave station number.
  • Page 888 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Write CANopen slave station data CANTX Bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) CANTX Continuous CANTXP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command － － － － Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal : Slave station number.
  • Page 889 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Refresh special D corresponding to CANopen CANFLS Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP) CANFLS Continuous CANFLSP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command － － －...
  • Page 890 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Internal communications write ICOMW Bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) ICOMW Continuous ICOMW Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command (17 STEP) DICOM Continuous DICOM Pulse execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079 : Selection of slave device.
  • Page 891 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Drive parameters write-in WPRA Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) WORA Continuous WORAP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: none － － － － Flag signal: none : Data that is going to write in : Parameter address of the write-in data Read the data of C2000 drive’s parameter H01.00 and write into D0, read data of...

  • Page 892: Error Display And Handling

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-7 Error display and handling Code Descript Recommended handling approach Turn power on and off when resetting the PLrA RTC time check keypad time Turn power on and off after making sure PLrt Incorrect RTC time that the keypad is securely connected Check whether the program has an error PLod...

  • Page 893: Canopen Master Control Applications

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16- 8 CANopen Master control applications Control of a simple multi-axis application is required in certain situations. If the device supports the CANopen protocol, a C2000 can serve as the master in implementing simple control (position, speed, homing, and torque control).
  • Page 894 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 After leaving the PLC register window, the register setting screen will appear, as shown  below: If there is a new PLC program and no settings have been made yet, you can read default data from the converter, and merely edit it to suit the current application.
  • Page 895 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 After reading the data, it is necessary to perform some special D settings. Before proceeding, we will first introduce the special D implications and setting range. The CANopen Master's special D range is currently D1070 to D1099 and D2000 to D2799; this range is divided into 3 blocks: - The first block is used to display CANopen's current status, and has a range of D1070–D1089 - The second block is used for CANopen's basic settings, and has a range of D1090–D1099...
  • Page 896 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Special D Description of Function D1073 CANopen break channel (bit0=Machine code0 …….) Error code of master error 0: No error D1074 1: Slave station setting error 2: Synchronizing cycle setting error (too small) D1075 Reserved D1076 SDO error message (main index value) D1077...
  • Page 897 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 If slave devices have a slow start-up, the master can delay for a short time before performing slave station configuration; this time delay can be set via D1092. Special D Description of Function Default D1092 Delay before start of initialization With regard to slave device initialization, a delay time can be set to judge whether failure has occurred.
  • Page 898 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 RXPDO PDO4 (Torque) PDO3 (Position) PDO2 (Remote I/O) PDO1 (Speed) Description Special D Description Special D Description Special D Description Special D Mode word D2009+100*n Mode word D2009+100*n Slave device DI D2026+100*n Mode word D2009+100*n D2022+100*n Actual torque D2018+100*n Actual position Slave device AI1 D2028+100*n Actual frequency D2013+100*n...
  • Page 899 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 frequency will also be automatically sent back to the master station (D2009+n*100 and D2013+n*100). This also illustrates how the master can handle these tasks through read/write operations in the special D area. Furthermore, it should be noted that the remote I/O of PDO2 can obtain the slave device's current DI and AI status, and can also control the slave device's DO and AO status.
  • Page 900 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Velocity Control PDO Default Special D Description of Function Default Torque restriction on slave station D2001+100*n number n Target speed of slave station number D2012+100*n ● n (rpm) Actual speed of slave station number D2013+100*n ▲...
  • Page 901 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 After gaining an understanding of special D definitions, we return to setting steps. After entering the values corresponding to D1090 to D1099, D2000+100*n, D2034+100*n and D2067+100*n, we can begin to perform downloading, which is performed in accordance with the following steps: 1.
  • Page 902 Step 5: Set the slave stations' station numbers, communications speed, control source, and command source Delta's C2000 and EC series devices currently support the CANopen communications interface drive, and the corresponding slave station numbers and communications speed parameters are as follows:...
  • Page 903 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Delta's A2 Servo currently supports the CANopen communications interface, and the corresponding slave station numbers and communications speed parameters are as follows: Corresponding device parameters Value Definition Slave station 03-00 1–127 CANopen Communication address address...
  • Page 904 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 2: Master memory correspondences Enable WPL  Use keypad set PLC mode as Stop (PLC 2)  WPL read D1070 to D1099, D2000 to D2799  Set D2000=10, D2100=11  Set D2100, 2200, 2300, 2400, 2500, 2600, 2700=0 ...
  • Page 905 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 6: Connect hardware wiring When performing wiring, note the head and tail terminal resistance; connection methods are as follows: Terminal Terminal resistor resistor Step 7: Initiate control After a program has been written and downloaded, switch the PLC mode to Run. Merely turn power to master and slave stations off and then on again.

  • Page 906: Explanation Of Various Plc Mode Controls (Speed, Torque, Homing, And Position)

    Please refer to Chapter 12-1 Pr. 05-00 for detailed explanation. ※ If a PM motor belongs to Delta's ECMA series, motor parameters can be directly input from data in the servo motor catalog, and parameter study will not be needed.
  • Page 907 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Speed mode control commands: FREQ(P) Target speed The first acceleration time setting The first deceleration time setting Example of speed mode control: Before performing speed control, if the FOC (magnetic field orientation) control method is used, setting of electromechanical parameters must first be completed.
  • Page 908 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Torque control: Register table for torque mode: Control special M Special M Description of Function Attributes M1040 Servo On Status special M Special M Description of Function Attributes M1056 Servo On Ready M1063 Torque attained Control special D Special D Description of Function...
  • Page 909 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Homing control / position control: Register table in homing mode / position mode: Control special M Special M Description of Function Attributes M1040 Servo On Move to new position, must use control mode as position mode (D1060 = M1048 1) and M1040 = 1 M1050...
  • Page 910 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 The DPOS command can now be used to designate the drive's target location. M1050 or Pr. 00-12 can be used to set a change in absolute or relative position. Implement M1048 Pulse ON once (must be more than 1 ms in duration), and the converter will begin to move toward the target (M1040 must be 1 to be effective).
  • Page 911 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Part 3: Point-to-point movement; switch to position mode (set D1060 = 1), and move back and forth between position points. (+300000 – -300000 ) P2P mode M101 D1060 Set control mode (0:V) P2P mode K4M200 +300000 M200 DPOS K300000...

  • Page 912: Internal Communications Main Node Control

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-10 Internal communications main node control The protocol has been developed in order to facilitate the use of RS-485 instead of CANopen in certain application situations. The RS-485 protocol offers similar real-time characteristics as CANopen; this protocol can only be used on the C2000 and CT2000 devices. The maximum number of slave devices is 8.
  • Page 913 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Master programming: In a program, D1110 can be used to define a slave station to be controlled (1–8, if set as 0, can jump between 8 stations). Afterwards, M1035 is set as 1, and the memory positions of the master and slave stations will correspond.
  • Page 914 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Description of Function Special D Attributes Speed mode Location mode Torque mode Homing mode Frequency command Position command Torque command Zero command arrival attained attained completed Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise Counterclockwise: Counterclockwise: Counterclockwise: Counterclockwise: D1126 + 10*N Warning Warning Warning...
  • Page 915 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 It is required slave station 1 maintains forward rotation at 30.00Hz for 1 sec., and maintains reverse rotation at 60.00 Hz for 1 sec., and repeat this cycle continuously. 16-154...

  • Page 916: Count Function Using Mi8

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-11 Count function using MI8 16-11-1 High-speed count function The C2000's MI8 supports one-way pulse counting, and the maximum speed is 100K. The starting method is very simple, and only requires setting M1038 to begin counting. The 32 bit count value is stored on D1054 and D1055 in non-numerical form.

  • Page 917: Modbus Remote Io Control Applications (Use Modrw)

    (0x01), read input (0x02), read register (0x03), write to single register (0x06), write to several coils (0x0F), and write to several registers (0x10). Explanations and the usage of these functions are provided as follows: MODRW command General Slave device is Delta's PLC Slave device is Delta's meaning meaning converter meaning...
  • Page 918 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 When the reported message indicates no error, it will switch to the next transmitted command M1077 M1078 M1079 ROLP K4M0 485 R/W 485 R/W 485 R/W rite is co rite is fail rite is time 0 If time out occurs or an error is reported, the M1077 will change to On.
  • Page 919 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 RTU-485: The station number = 8 (give example) ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 DR2 DR1 DR0 A/R Communication station #: ID0~ ID7 are defined as 2 , 2 , 2 ...2 , 2 Communication protocol Communication Protocol Communicaton Speed...
  • Page 920 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 3: Physical configuration Step 4: Write to PLC program 16-159...
  • Page 921 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-160...
  • Page 922 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 Step 5: Actual testing situation: I/O testing: When the switch is activated, it can be discovered that the display corresponds to M115–M108. Furthermore, it can be seen that one output point light is added every 1 sec. (the display uses a binary format) This light signal increase by 1number per second.
  • Page 923 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-162...

  • Page 924: Calendar Function

    Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 16-13 Calendar functions The C2000's internal PLC includes calendar functions, but these may only be used when a keypad (KPC-CC01) is connected, otherwise the function cannot be used. Currently-supported commands include TCMP (comparison of calendar data), TZCP (calendar data range comparison), TADD (calendar data addition), TSUB (calendar data subtraction), and TRD (calendar reading).
  • Page 925 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000 *If the keypad is suddenly pulled out while the calendar is operating normally, and is not reconnected for more than 1 minute, PLrt will be triggered. Practical applications: We will perform a demo of simple applications. We first correct the keypad time.

  • Page 926: Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function

    Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function 17-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate 17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description 17-3 Wiring Diagram 17-4 Parameter 17-5 Operating Sequence Description 17-6 New Error Code for STO Function 17-1...

  • Page 927: The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate

    Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 17-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate Item Definition Standard Performance Channel 1: 80.08% Safe Failure Fraction IEC61508 Channel 2: 68.91% HFT (Type A Hardware Fault Tolerance IEC61508 subsystem) IEC61508 SIL 2 Safety Integrity Level IEC62061 SILCL 2 Average frequency of dangerous failure...

  • Page 928: Wiring Diagram

    Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 17-3 Wiring Diagram 17-3-1 Internal STO circuit as below: I /O C a rd C2000 + 24 V ST O1 SCM1 Li ne Gat e C PU drive dr ive S TO2 S CM2 M CM M O1 DC M...
  • Page 929 Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 17-3-3 The control loop wiring diagram: 1. Remove the shot-circuit of +24V-STO1-STO2 and DCM-SCM1-SCM2. 2. The wiring as below diagram. The ESTOP switch must at Close status in normal situation and drive will be able to Run. 3.

  • Page 930: Parameters

    Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 17-4 Parameters  STO Alarm Latch Default: 0 Settings 0：STO Alarm Latch 1：STO Alarm no Latch  Pr. 06-44=0 STO Alarm Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, a Reset command is needed to clear the STO Alarm.

  • Page 931: Operating Sequence Description

    Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 17-5 Operating Sequence Description 17-5-1 Normal operation status As shown in Figure 3: When the STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2=ON (no STO function is needed), the drive will execute “Operating” or “Output Stop” according to RUN/STOP command. Figure 3 17-5-2-1 STO, Pr.
  • Page 932 Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 17-5-3 STO, Pr. 06-44=1 Figure 6 17-5-4 STL1 Figure 7 17-5-4 STL2 Figure 8 17-7...

  • Page 933: New Error Code For Sto Function

    Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000 17-6 New Error Code for STO Function Present Fault Record Second Most Recent Fault Record Third Most Recent Fault Record Fourth Most Recent Fault Record Fifth Most Recent Fault Record Sixth Most Recent Fault Record Settings 72: Channel 1 (STO1–SCM1)internal hardware error 76: STO (Safe Torque Off)

  • Page 934: Appendix A. Revision History

    The descriptions of new extension cards, EMC-A22A (I/O relay), CMC-EC01 (Communication, EtherCAT), and CMC-PN01 (Communication, PROFINET). Chapter 8 Delta standard filedbus cable list. Efficiency curve, and derating curve of voltage / current. Chpater 9 A note to describe how to use VFDSoft when OS is Win10, and a process of Chapter 10 Start Wizard.
  • Page 935 Appendix A. Revision History C2000 Updated information Description Related part Nameplate information, and the decription of RFI jumper. Chapter 1 The decriptions of using the lifting hook and the figure. Chpater 3 The wiring diagrams of all frame sizes, and the wiring of SINK (NPN) / Chpater 4 SOURCE (PNP) mode.
  • Page 936 Appendix A. Revision HistoryC2000 Updated information Description Related part The descriptions of the adjustment and application for AC drive. Section 12-2 The descriptions of the warning codes Chpater 13 The descriptions of the fault codes Chpater 14 The descriptions of the bit setting for 2060H, 2020H. And the descriptions of Chpater 15 speed mode, torque mode, PDO type no.

Table of Contents